Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
edition
There has not been any drastic changes in the present edition. Of course
some of the typographical and other smaH mistakes, posted on the internet
page for the book, have been corrected. In addition, we have added OCC8Ssional comments and clarifications at some places, hoping that they would
make the discussions more accessible to a beginner.
The only serious departure from the first edition has been in the notation for spinor solutions of the Dirac equation. In the previous edition,
we put a subscript on the spinors which corresponded to their helicities.
In this edition, we change the notation 'towards what is more conventionaL
This notation has been introduced in 4.3 and explained in detail in 4.6.
We have received many requests for posting the answers to the exercises.
In this edition, we have added answers to some exercises which actually
require an answer. The web page for the errata of the book is now at
http://tnp.saha.ernet.in/~pbpal/books/qft/errata.html
presen~ edition,
web page.
It is a pleasure to thank everyone who has contributed to this book
by pointing out errors or asking for clarifications. On the errata page we
have acknowledged all correspondence which have affected some change. In
particular, comments by C. S. Aulakh, Martin Einhorn and Scan Murray
Amitabha Lahiri
Palash B. Pal
July 2004
vii
Vlll
Preface
ton, is taken up next in Chapter 8. After this, we have a detailed introduction to quantum electrodynamics in Chapter 9, where we introduce the
crucial concept of gauge invariance and give detailed derivations of important scattering processes at their lowest orders in perturbation theory.
Discrete symmetries can serve as a good guide in calculating higher order corrections. With this in mind, we discuss parity, time reversal, charge
conjugation, and their combinations, in Chapter ] O. Unlike most other
textbooks on the subject which describe the P, T, C transformations only
in the Pauli-Dirac representation of the Dirac matrices, we present them in
a completely representation-independent way. Since other representations
such as the Majorana or the chiral representations are very useful in some
contexts, we hope that the general formulation will be of use to students
and researchers.
We calculate loop diagrams in Chapter 11, showing how to use symmetries of a problem to parametrize quantum corrections. In this chapter, we
restrict ourselves to finite contributions only. Some basic concepts of renormalization are then described, with detailed calculations, in Chapter 12.
Only the electromagnetic gauge symmetry is used in these two chapters for
illustrative purpose. But this leads to a more general discussion of symmetries, which is done in Chapter 13. This chapter also discusses the general
ideas of symmetry breaking, and the related physics of Nambu-Goldstone
theorem as well as its evasion through the Higgs mechanism. This is followed by an introduction to the Yang-Mills (or non-Abelian) gauge theories
in Chapter 14. Finally, a basic introduction to standard electroweak theory and electroweak processes is given in Chapter 15. In keeping with our
overall viewpoint, we discuss decays as well as scattering processes in this
chapter.
We have tried to keep the book at the elementary level. In other words,
this is a book for someone with no prior knowledge of the subject, and only
.a reasonable familiarity with special relativity and quantum mechanics. To
set the stage as well as to help the reader, we visit briefly the relevant
parts of classical field theory in Chapter 2. A short but comprehensive
introduction to group theory also appears in Chapter 13, since we did not
want to assume any background in group theory for the reader.
The most important tools to help the reader are the exercise problems
in the book. These problems are not collected at the ends of chapters.
Instead, any problem appears in the place of the text where we felt it
would be most beneficial for the reader to have it worked out. Working it
out at that stage should also prepare the reader for the ensuing parts of
the chapter. Even if for some reason the reader does not want to work out
a problem at that stage, we suggest strongly to at least read carefully the
statement of the problem before proceeding further. Some of the problems
come with notes or hints, some come with a relation that might be useful
later. A few of the problems are marked with a * sign, implying that they
Preface
IX
might be a little hard at that stage of the book, and the reader can leave
it at that point to visit it later. A few have actually been worked out later
in the book, but we have not marked them.
The book was submitted in a camera-ready form to the publishers. This
means that we are responsible for all the mistakes in the book, including
typographical ones. We have spared no effort to avoid errors, but if any
has crept in, we would like to hear about it frum the reader. We have set
up a web site at
http://tnp. saha. ernet. in/rvpbpal/qftbk .html
containing errata for the hook, and a way of contacting us.
The book grew out of courses that both of us have taught at several
universities and research institutes in India ami ahroad. We have ben
efited from the enquiries and criticisms of OUl' students and colleagues.
Indrajit Mitra went through the entire manw;cript carefully and offered
numerous suggestions. Many other friends and colleagues also read parts
of the manuscript and made useful comments, in particular Kaushik Bhat
tacharya, Ed Copeland, A. Harindranath, H. S. Mani, Jose Nieves, Saurabh
Rindani. Those who have taught and influenced liS through their lectures,
books and papers are too numerous to name sepa.rately. We thank them
all.
We thank our respective institutes for extending various facilities while
the book was being written.
Amitabha Lahiri
Palash B. Pal
April 2000
Notations
Space-time indices of a vector or tensor.
JJ., II,
i,i,
gpol.J
=- L: aP-b,..
;. "'(/Jaw
Notations
Xli
S/i S-matrix element between initial state Ii) and final state If}.
.4lfi Feynman amplitude between initial sLate
1_4f1 2
,
lit
= 2-
!N.
'
a/. + i9I:,A~.
Contents
Preface to the second edition
vii
Notations
xi
1 Preliminaries
1.1 Why Quantum Field Theory
1.2 Creation and annihilation operators
1.3 Special relativity . . . . . . .
1.4 Space and time in relativistic quantum theory.
1.5
Natural units . . . .
1
1
3
5
8
9
12
12
12
14
15
15
17
19
21
28
28
29
30
xiii
34
36
37
37
39
40
41
Contents
XIV
47
47
51
4.5
4.6
59
60
61
62
63
65
4.7
Propagator
69
4.4
Examples of interactions
Evolution operator
5-matrix.
Wick\; theorem . .
54
54
56
59
72
73
75
80
82
87
87
94
97
101
105
106
110
112
115
115
117
117
122
130
133
135
137
140
142
143
144
Contents
xv
146
146
149
150
153
156
158
162
164
9 Quantum electrodynamics
9.1 Local gauge invariance .
9.2 Interaction Hamiltonian
9.3 Lowest order processes .
9.4 Electron-electron scattering
9.5 Electron-positron scattering
9.6 e-e+ --+ ~- ~+
.
9.7 Consequence of gauge invariance
9.8 Compton scattering
.
9.9 Scattering by an external field . .
9.10 Bremsstrahlung
.
166
166
170
172
174
180
182
184
185
194
197
200
200
201
201
202
204
205
207
207
211
212
212
213
216
217
218
10.2 Parity
.
10.2.1 Free scalar fields
10.2.2 Free Dirac field .
10.2.3 Free photon field
10.2.4 Interacting fields
10.3 Charge conjugation.
10.3.1 Free fields .
10.3.2 Interactions.
10.4 Time reversal . . . .
10.4.1 Antilinearity
10.4.2 Free fields .
10.4.3 Interactions
10.5 CP .
10.6 CPT
.
11 Electromagnetic form factors
11.1 General electromagnetic vertex
11.2 Physical interpretation of form factors
11.2.1 Charge form factor F 1 . . . . .
11.2.2 Anomalous magnetic mOE1ent F2
11.2.3 Electric dipole moment F2 . . . .
222
222
224
224
228
228
xvi
Contents
229
230
239
241
12 Renormalization
12.1 Degree of divergence of a diagram
.
12.1.1 Superficial degree of divergence . . . . .
12.1.2 Superficial vs. real degree of divergence
245
245
245
248
250
252
253
256
256
257
259
260
260
265
267
267
270
272
273
275
275
276
279
283
283
284
284
286
289
292
293
294
295
299
300
301
301
303
Contents
13.5.3 Interaction of Goldstone bosons .
13.6 Higgs mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
305
308
312
312
315
318
318
319
321
322
323
326
326
326
328
330
330
332
333
335
335
338
339
340
342
346
346
349
351
355
356
A Useful formulas
A.l Representation of 1'-matrices
A.2 Traces of 1'-matrices . . . .
A.3 The antisymmetric tensor . .
A.4 Useful integration formulas .
A.4.1 Angular integrations in N-dimensional space
A.4.2 Momentum integration in loops.
358
358
360
363
364
364
366
368
Index
371
Chapter 1
Preliminaries
The era of quantum mechanics began when Planck postulated that
the modes of radiation of angular frequency w could be counted as
particles with energy E = fu.J, and derived the iaw of blackbody
radiation without running into infinities. The physical implications
of this fundamental postulate became clearer when Einstein showed
that quantization of radiation also explained the frequency dependence of photoelectric effect. This soon led to a proliferation of new
ideas due to Bohr, Dirac, Born, SchrOdinger, Heisenberg and many
others, who appiied the idea of quantization to particles and found
remarkable success in describing subatomic phenomena. Dirac even
constructed a relativistic theory of the electron, which was in excellent agreement with subatomic experiments. Despite its success,
there were some essential shortcomings of quantum mechanics of particles.
1.1
Chapter 1. Prelirninades
(1.1)
(1.2)
This of course call happell only if the total killctic energy of the initial
e- e+ pair is larger than the rest mass energy of the extra pair to be
1.2
H =
2~ (p2 + m 2w 2x 2)
(1.3)
1
a=J1
(P-imwx),a t =J
(p+imwx),(1.4)
2mliw
2mliw
sa that the Hamiltonian is
H =
~Iiw (ala + aa t )
(1.5)
[x,pj_ == xp - px = ih.
(1.6)
This implies that the objects a and at, defined in Eq. (1.4), are also
operators. Unlike x and p, these are non-hermitian operators, and
they satisfy the relation
[a,atl_
= 1.
(1.7)
Chapter 1. Preliminaries
Moreover, they have the crucial property which can easily be checked
directly from Eqs. (1.3) and (104):
[H,ul- = -fu.Ju,
IH,atl_ = /twa!.
(1.8)
(1.9)
The relations in Eq. (1.8) implies that, if In) is an eigenstate of H
with eigenvalue En. i.e., if
H In) = En In) ,
(1.10)
= (En
- fu.J)a In),
Hat In)
. (1.11)
alO) = 0.
(1.12)
Using Eq. (1.9) now, we can easily find its energy eigenvalue:
H 10) =
~fu.J 10)
(1.13)
The first excited state, which we will denote by II), can be defined
by the state whose energy is larger than the ground state by one
quantum, i.e.,
II} = at 10) .
(1.14)
It is easy to see that the energy eigenvalue of the state In} is given
by
E n =(n+
2)1iw.
(U6)
JV=ata.
(1.17)
ShOUl
1.3
Special relativity
Chapter 1. Preliminaries
1,2,3. Thus,
x" == (xO,x i ) == (cl,x) ,
(1.18)
3
~)Xi
(xo _ yO)2 _
_ yi)2
(1.19)
1=1
(1.20)
Here, the values of the various components of the metric tensor are
9"v=diag(I,-I,-I,-I),
(1.21)
which means that 900 = +1, 911 = 922 = 933 = -I, and 9"v = 0 if
J.I. # v. In addition, we have used the summation convention, which
says that any index which appears twice in the same term is summed
over. We can use the metric to lower the indices, e.g.:
(1.22) .
Similarly, one can use the inverse of the matrix gpoV} which will be
denoted by gpo-v} to raise the indices:
x lt =
glt
xv
(1.23)
= gJJ.\. }
(1.24)
= 6~
o~ =
>
{ 1 if I" = A
0 if I" ;l A.
(1.25)
where the specific form of the matrix A is not very important for our
purposes. These transformations are defined to be the ones which
leave x~xJl invariant:
(1.27)
- gpa
(1.28)
X JJ
is giucn b1J
(1.29)
o Exercise 1.6 [f 0. primed frame of reference moues with respect to
an unprimed onf'. with a. uniform 'llelocitll v along the common xnris, the Lorentz transformation equa.tions between the co-ordinates
in the two frames a.re gillen by
t' = '"((t - vx/c'),
y' = y,
z' = z,
(1.30)
Any object that remains invariant like xjJ.xjJ. is a scalar quantity. Any
four-component object that transforms like xl-'- is called a contravariant vector, whereas a four-component object transforming like x!' is
a covariant vector.
The scalar product of two vectors A~ and B~ will be written as
g~"A~B"
= A~B~ = A~B~
= AoB o + A,B' = AOBo -
A B,
(1.31)
6</> = aa</>
x~
6x~.
(1.32)
Chapter 1. Preliminaries
It
(1.33)
For some arbitrary vector Ap.. I
(1.34)
The wave operator 0 is a scalar operator I
_l&"
o = c2 &1 2
2_
- a~{)J' .
(1.35)
Exercise 1.7 Write Maxwell's equa.tions and the LorenbjoTce!O'rmula in 4-'UectoT nota.tion. Get the signs right!
1.4
(1.39)
is interpreted by saying that if one tries to make a measurement of
energy to an accuracy ~E, the measurement process should take a
time ~t which is related to ~E by the above relation. Now that x
is also a parameter, the interpretation of Eq. (1.38) must also follow
the line of that of Eq. (1.39). In other words, we should understand
that the measurement of momentum to an accuracy ~Px requires
that the measurement be performed in a region whose spatial extent
is larger than ~x given by Eq. (1.38).
1.5
Natural units
c=l.
(1.40)
Chapter 1. Preliminaries
10
Quantity
Mass
Length
Time
Energy
Momentum
Force
Action
Electric charge
Dimension
Conversion factor
[M]
l/e 2
nc
n
IMt'
[M]-'
[M]
[M]
[M]'
l/e
l/ne
[M]D
[M]D
v'nC
The resulting units are called natural units, which will be used in the
rest of this book. The dimensions of various quantities in these units
are presented in Table 1.1. We have given the conversion factors for
quantities expressed in energy units, which is universally preferred
in calculations. Readers should note that most other texts give conversion factors for mass units.
The electric charge is defined in such a way that Coulomb's law
about the force F between two charges q, and q, takes the form
F = q,q, r.
(1.41)
47Tr 3
Thus electric charge is dimensionless, as ~hown In Table 1.1. The
unit of electric charge will be taken to be the charge of the proton, e.
The fine-structure constant 0:: is related to this unit by the following
relation:
e > O.
(1.42)
C'F m 5
= 192"." '
(1.43)
I
I
11
Chapter 2
2.1
2.1.1
t2
.fl1 =
I,,
dt L(q,(t),4,(t).t).
(2.1)
The Lagrangian L is a function of the co-ordinates q, and the velocities qrl and tl and t2 are the initial and final times between which
we are studying the evolution of the system. If there is a source or
12
13
q,(t)
q,(t)
+ oq,(t) ,
4,(t)
4,(t)
:t
(2.2)
oq,(t).
o.vl =
1.'2
tl
d -8'
8L] oq,
dt [8L
-8 - -d
qr
t qr
8L
1'2 .
+ 8---,--oq,
qr
(2.4)
tl
Since we are looking at paths connecting given initial and final con-
figurations q,(tIl and q,(t2), we shall not vary the end points. So we
set
(2.5)
and the last term of Eq. (2.4) vanishes. The principle of least action
states that, near the classical path, the variation of the action should
be zero. Since this is true for any arbitrary variation of the path,
Le., for arbitrary oq,(t), o.vl = 0 implies that
d (8L)
8L
dt 84, = 8q, .
(2.6)
14
L =
~lTlX2 -
V(x),
(2.7)
(2.8)
:tlTlX = -V'V,
2.1.2
"a
uqr
L(q, q).
(2.9)
There will be one such equation for each value of the index r. Since
the Lagrangian is a function of the positions and the velocities, the
right hand sides of these equations are in general functions of the
q's and the (j's. Let us assume that these equations are invertible,
Le., the q's can be solved in terms of the positions and the momenta.
Then the Hamiltonian is defined by the Legendre transformation
(2.10)
dH = q,dp,.
aL. )
+ p,dq,.. - (aL
n-dq,. + oo-dq,.
uqr
(2.11 )
U{Jr
The terms with dqr cancel each other owing to the definition of the
momentum in Eq. (2.9). The term with dq,. can be simplified by the
use of the Euler-Lagrange equation and Eq. (2.9), so that we can
finally write
dH = qrdpr - p,.dq,. ,
(2.12)
15
aH
Pr=-aqr
(2.13)
[II. hlp
(2.14)
where ~ occurs if
2.2
2.2.1
(2.16)
af
at +lJ,HJp.
(2.17)
16
always called the Lagrangian, and the word 'density' is implied for
the sake of brevity. We will always use the word Lagmngian in this
sense from now on. However, we will denote it by a different symbol,
viz, .!'. If, at any point, we need to use the word Lagrangian in the
sense used in particle mechanics, we will call it the total Lagrangian
and will denote it by L.
The Lagrangian should depend on the fields, which we denote
generically by <j>A Here, different values of the index A can denote
completely independent fields, or the different members of a set of
fields which are related by some internal symmetry, or maybe the
components of a field which transforms non-trivially under Lorentz
transformations, e.g., like a vector. In any case, the field or fields
denoted by <j>A take the role of the co-ordinates qr of Eq. (2.1).
What then replaces the velocities tIr of Eq. (2.1)? These should
be the derivatives of the fields. However, we cannot have only the
time derivative in this case, since spatial co-ordinates are independent
parameters as well. We therefore should expect the Lagrangian to
depend on the derivatives 8/1 <I> A .
And finally, since we are interested about fundamental fields, we
should not expect any source or sink of energy or momentum in the
system. Thus, the Lagrangian should not depend explicitly on the
space-time co-ordinates. So finally we can write the action in the
form
PI =
In
d'x.Y (<j>A(x),
a~<j>A(x))
(2.18)
17
2.2.2
Euler-Lagrange equations
Given the Lagrangian, the classical equations of motion can be derived from the principle of least action. This states that the system
evolves through field configurations which keep the action PI stationary against small variations of the fields q,A which vanish on the
boundary of n.
Consider therefore the variations
<t>A(X) ~ q,A{x)
+ 6q,A{x),
a~<t>A{x) ~ a~<t>A{x)
+ a,,6q,A(x),
(2.19)
(2.20)
We now invoke Gauss theorem, which, for 4 dimensions, reads
r dS
Jan
FI'
J1.
'
(2.21)
where F~ is any well-behaved vector field, dS" is the outward pointing volume element on the boundary an. Using this, we can write
the last term in Eq. (2.20) as an integral over an. However, the integrand now contains 64>A, which vanishes everywhere on af!. Thus,
the last term in Eq. (2.20) vanishes.
18
As for the other terms, we notice that they must vanish for arbitrary variations of the fields. This can be true only if the expression
multiplying o4>A vanishes, which implies
(2.22)
These equations, one for eoch 4>A, are called the Euler-Lagrange equations for the system.
o Exercise 2.1 The Lagrangian (density) of an electromagnetic jield
interQcting 'With a c'u:rTent jJl is given by
(2.23)
where F'lii = 8j.iA v - 8 v AJJ> Treating the All's as the fields, find
the EulerLagro.nge equations and show that they give the inhomo
gcnoous Maxwell's equations.
o Exercise 2.2 For a real scalur field <P, the Lagrangian is !L' =
!(o")(o") - !m'' - V(). Find Ute Euler-Lo.gnmge equo.tions.
o Exercise 2.3 Do the same Jor a complex scalar field <P with Lugro.ngian!L' ~ (o")t(o") - m't - V(<p' ).
(2.24)
When the fields are varied infinitesimally by o4>A, the changes in octions defined from these two Lagrangian. would differ by the amount
(2.25)
Using Gauss theorem of Eq. (2.21), this can be rewritten as an integral over the boundary &0. But since o4>A vanishes on the boundary,
we find that 0$" = aNI, which means that the equations of motion
obtained from .!L" and .!L' would be identical.
2.3
19
Hamiltonian formalism
qi
are independent
variables in the Lagrangian formalism. In particular, oq;/oqj = Jij ,
(2.27)
whereas the functional derivatives of the ficlds and their spatial
derivatives with respect to 4>A vanish identically. In Eq. (2.27), notice that the functional derivative of 4> with respect to itself is not
dimensionless, but has the dimensions of an inverse volume.
20
Notice that the Lagrangian is a function of the fields and their partial derivatives with respect to all space-time co-ordinates. In the
Hamiltonian, the field derivatives with respect to time have been replaced by the canonical momenta. However, the Hamiltonian can
AI"8
Exercise 2.5 There is some freedom in defining the electroma.gnetic 'Potentials AJ.'. Usin.9 this freedom, we can make AO = O. This
is an example oj gauge fixing. In this gauge, treating the components of A as the independent fields, find out the momenta. Can
these equations be inuerted to soLve the Ai's, wheT'e the index i runs
oueT' spatial components onlll'?
[F"F2]p =
3 (JF'
JF2
JF,
JF2 )
d X J<I>A(t,x) JITA(t,x) - JIIA(t,x) J<I>A(t,x)
(2.29)
(2.30)
A 3
(2.31)
A]
[<I> (t,x),IIa(t,y) p =
d z
d3 z
(J<I>A(t,X) JITa(t,y)
J<I>C(t,z) JITc(t,z)
_ J<I>A(t,x) JIIa(t,y))
JITc(t,z) J<I>C(t,z)
(J~J3(X - z)J~J3(y - z) -
= J~J3(X - y).
0)
(2.32)
21
Exercise 2.6 Find the. Hamillon\Q:n faT the complex srotnT field
whose Lagrangian has been gi:uen in Ex. 2.3 (p 18).
Exercise 2.7 Con.sider 0. rodiation field in 0. onedimensl.onQ,l box
equi'Uo.lenUy displa.cements on a. string of Length I with jUed ends.
(This wo.s the "'11 first attempt at fieLd theo'1l.)
01'
L =
l'
dx [ (::)' _
(2.33)
,,(x,t) = Lq.(t)sin
(W:X) ,
W,
= bee/l.
(2.34)
k;;:l
J n [a e-'wo +
2lwk
<
(2.35)
at
2.4
Noether's theorem
x ll
--I>
x'Po
= x ll + dx P
(2.36)
22
oJil
= in,d"x' ~(4)'A(X'),a;.<I>,A(X'))
-in
d 4x
~ (4)A(X), 8"4>A(X))
(2.38)
os;(
by x and wri te
oJil =
=
in,
in
d"x
d4x
Jrr-n
in
d'x
~ (4)A(x), 8"4>A(x))
~ (4)A(x), 8"4>A(x))]
d"x ~ (4),A(x),a;.4>,A(x))
(2.39)
The last term is an integral over the infinitesimal volume fl' - fl, so
we can replace it by an integral over the boundary an,
=
=
Jon
in
dS"
oX''~(4)A,8"4>A)
bf(x)
=j'(x) - f(x)
= [j'(x') - f(xlJ - 1J'(x') - J'(x)J
= of (x) - 8"f(x)ox" ,
(2.41)
23
(2.42)
using Euler-Lagrange equation, Eq. (2.22), to get the last equality.
Putting this in Eq. (2.39) and using Eq. (2.40), we obtain
6d
in d"
= in d"
=
(2.43)
where we have used Eq. (2.41) again to bring back 6<I>A, and defined
a2' ,,"... A
T~v = a(a~<I>A)u",
-
g~V
'"
..L,
(2.44)
(2.45)
and write
(2.46)
This relation holds for arbitrary variations of the fields and coordinates provided the equations of motion are satisfied.
Even though the right hand side of Eq. (2.46) is the integral of a
total divergence, it does not necessarily vanish, because the current
need not vanish on the boundary. If however there is a symmetry,
24
6Jif vanishes for arbitrary n even without the use of the equations
of motion. In that case, we obtain a conservation law
(2.47)
when the equations of motion are satisfied. This result is called
Noether's theorem, and the current J" in this case is called the
Noether current. Note that J" is defined only up to a constant factor.
It may so happen that under the symmetry transformations of
Eqs. (2.36) and (2.37), the action does not remain invariant but
instead changes by the integral of a total divergence,
(2.48)
Then the expression for the corresponding conserved current will be
the same as in Eq. (2.45), plus V".
It is easy to see that Eq. (2.47) implies the conservation of a
charge, called Noether charge. It is defined by an integral over all
space,
(2.49)
provided the current vanishes sufficiently rapidly at spatial infinity.
This is because
(2.50)
The last expression can be converted into a surface integral on the
spatial surface at infinity, on which it should vanish. Thus,
dQ =0
dt
'
(2.51)
25
a~,
we conclude that
= 0
(2.54)
p~ =
d3 x
T'~ ,
(2.55)
Exercise 2.8 Find the stress-eneT91l tensor JOT the following fields:
O.
Lorentz transformations
(2.57)
The factor of appears because otherwise each independent component of w is counted twice because of antisymmetry. Putting these
in Eq. (2.45), we obtain
T~A WApX p]
- 0
-
(2.58)
26
Pulling out the w~p which are constants, and also using the antisymmetry property of them, we can write this as
& M"~P - 0
"
(2.59)
-,
where
(2.60)
J~p =
d 3x MO~p
Jij I
(2.61)
by
J k --
~<ijkJ ..
2
(2.62)
IJ'
Internal symmetries are those which relate different fields at the same
space-time point. In this case ox" = 0, and let us write the infinites-.
imal transformations of the fields as
r = 1 ... p
"
(2.63)
which leaves the action invariant. Here the O<r are infinitesimal parameters independent of space-time, and f:'(x) are specified functions of the fields 4>A and their derivatives. The index r is not
summed over, it indicates the type of symmetry. In other words,
there may be several independent symmetries in a system. We can
treat them separately by defining the conserved current for the roth
symmetry as
"
&.!L' o4>A
r
J = &(&,,4>A) O<r .
(2.64)
fieldoJ
-+
27
a.) Use Noether'g theorem to Jind the colTesponding conserued current p'. Verifll 0s.j" = O.
b) Ca.lcula.te the conserued N oether turn.',nt for the, sa.me transformation when the electroma.gnetic field is also included, and the
combined La.gra.ngian is
!L'
= _~F"vFvV + [(a"
- iqA,,)tll(a,.
+ iqA v )]
_m't - V(t)
(2.65)
bx,
(2.66)
Exercise 2.11 Suppose the action of a certain fl.eld theory is in'llarlant under space-time translations as well us dilatations
x-tbx,
"-
(2.67)
'LS
traceless, i.e.,
Chapter 3
3.1
Equation of motion
(3.1)
In quantum theory, momentum is treated as an operator whose coordinate space representation is given by
PIA ---+ ia~
(3.2)
which operates on the wavefunctions. Thus, if we tried to represent the particles by a single wavefunction >(x), we would simply
substitute Eq. (3.2) into Eq. (3.1) and obtain
(0 + m 2 ) >(x) = O.
(3.3)
This is called the Klein-Gomon equation after the people who suggested it.
It looks simple enough, but there is a problem. The energy eigenvalues satisfy
(3.4)
28
29
Notice that energy can be negative, and its magnitude can be arbitrarily large since the magnitude of p, which we denote by p, is
not bounded. Thus, the system will have no ground state. The system will collapse into larger and larger negative values of energy and
will be totally unstable. Hence, a wavefunction interpretation of the
Klein-Gordon equation is not possible. We will see that this problem
will be evaded once we interpret (x) as a quantum field, with a
proper prescription for quantization.
3.2
.!/ =
i(8")(a~) -
i m2 2
(3.5)
4>
o Exercise 3:.2 From the Lagrangian in Eq. (3.5), shoUJ that the momentum canonical to <P is
n(x) = 4>(x) ,
(3.6)
' =
(3.7)
In particle mechanics, the Poisson brackets between the coordinates and the canonical momenta were derived in Eq. (2.15).
In order to go over to Quantum Mechanics, one can just use the
replacement
(38)
whereby one obtains the commutation relation of Eq. (1.6). Similarly,
in the case of the fields, once we obtained the canonical momentum
II, we can use the same prescription to replace Eq. (2.32) by
1(t,x),II(t,y)L = iJ 3 (x - y)
(3.9)
30
3.3
Here the factor outside the integral sign is just a normalizing factor, whose convenience will be seen later. Inside the integral sign,
apart from the usual Fourier components A(p), we have put a factor
31
(0 + m') (x) =
+ m')5(p' -
m')A(p)e- ip .X
= O.
(3.11)
A(-p)
= At(p).
e(z)=
I
O!
e,
(3.12)
if z > 0,
ifz=O,
if z < O.
(3.13)
(x) =
+ At(p)e'P'x)
(3.14)
5 ( f(z) )
(3.15)
5(p' - m')
= 5 ((pO)' =
21~OI
Zn.
En
[5(pO - E p )
+ 5(l + E p )]
(3.16)
32
where from now
eigenvalue:
Oll,
Ep
= +VP 2 +m 2
(3.17)
When Eq. (3.16) is substituted into Eq. (3.14), the second 6-function
does not contribute to the integral since this is zero everywhere in
the region where 8(po) i' o. The other 6-function contributes to the
integral and gives
(x) =
d3p
( a(p)e-'.px
V(21r)32Ep
.)
+ at (p)e'px
(3.18)
where
(3.19)
and we have introduced the notation
a(p)
A(p)
(3.20)
JIE;.
= (x) =
J iV 2(~;)3
3
dp
(_a(p)e- iPX
+ at(p)e iPX )
(3.21).
[a(p) , at (p')
L = 6 (p -
[a(p), a(p')L
p'),
= 0,
(3.22)
33
[q,(t,x),IT(t,y)J- =
2(2~)3 Jd p Jd p' j~
{[a(p),al(p')L
[al(p),a(p')L
e-ip.x+ip'.y -
eiP.X-iP'.Y}
(3.23)
where xO = yO = t. The commutators give a-functions, and so the
integration over p' can easily be performed. Note that once this is
done, it forces p = pi, which also means E'l = Epl. In the exponents,
the time components in the dot products therefore cancel, and we
are left with
This immediately reduces to Eq. (3.9) if we recall the integral representation of the 6-function of the form:
63 (x _ y) =
d p
e-ip.(,,-y)
(2")3
[4>(t,x),8i 4>(t,y)!_ = 0
(3.25)
(3.26)
34
the integral over all space. Each of the exponential factors will give
us a momentum cS"-function. If we now integrate over one of the
momenta, say pI, we get for the different terms in the Hamiltonian
the following results:
J ,flx rr 2 (x)
=J
,flp
r;
i::.
=J
d3p
[a(p)a(_p)e-2iEp'+a(p)at(p)
2E.
+at(p)a(p) +at(p)at(_p)e2iEp'] . (3.29)
m
This yields
=~J
+ a(p)at(p)]
(3.30)
Once again, the similarity with Eq. (1.5) is obvious. Moreover, one
can check the following relations:
[H,a(p')I_
[H,at(p')J_
= -E.,a(p')
= +E.,at(p') ,
(3.31)
which are similar to the relations in Eq. (1.8). The analogy between
the simple harmonic oscillator and the field is now complete. It is
clear that we can interpret a(p) as the annihilation operator and
at(p) as the creation operator for a field quantum with momentum
p. What was the positive energy component of the classical field
now annihilates the quantum, and the negative energy component
now creates the quantum. This quantum is what we call a particle
of positive energy.
3.4
The ground state of the field, which is called the vacuum in fieldtheoretical parlance, can now be defined in analogy with Eq. (1.12).
35
Here, it reads
a(p) 10) =
for all p.
(3.32)
(3.33)
H =
tPp Ep [at(p)a(p)
+ ~83(0)p]
(3.34)
which would be the analog of Eq. (1.9) for this case. The subscript
p after the 8-function in this equation is just to remind us that it is
a 8-function for the zero of momentum, not the zero of co-ordinate.
The distinction is not really relevant here, but the notation will be
useful later. What comes out from this way of writing is that, if we
consider the ground state energy, Le., the expectation value of the
total Hamiltonian in the ground state, we obtain
(3.35)
which is infinite!
The point is that, here we have one oscillator for each value of the
momentum. Thus, we have an infinite number of oscillators. Since
each oscillator has a finite ground state energy, the contributions
from all such oscillators add up to give us an infinite result for the
total ground state energy.
This, by itself, is not a catastrophe. After all, energy differences
are physical quantities, absolute values of energies are not. We can
just redefine the zero of energy such that the ground state energy
vanishes. For this, we need a consistent prescription so that we
do not run into trouble with other variables. This prescription is
called normal ordering. Stated simply, it means that whenever we
encounter a product of creation and annihilation operators, we define
a normal-ordered product by moving all annihilation operators to the
right of all creation operators as if the commu tators were zero. Once
36
This expression immediately shows two things. First, for any state
11lI) ,
(1lIIH: I Ill) =
=
J
J
d3 p E p (1lIIat(p)a(p)1 Ill)
3
d p E p Ila(p) 11lI)
(3.37)
(3.38)
so that the vacuum defined earlier is really the state of lowest energy,
i.e., the ground state.
D Exercise 3.5
a.) For 0. real massiue scalar fleld, calculnte the
4-momentum PIJ =
d3 x ']'O1l in terms of creo.tion and a.nnihila.tion operators. Show tha.t nonnal ordering is not required
jor P'.
b) Show that Ie/>, P"I_ = Wee/>
3.5
Fock space
So far, we have defined only the vacuum state, which is a state with
no particles. We shall need other states, in particular states with
specified particle content, when we start describing physical events.
We can define such states in analogy with excited states of oscillators.
For example, we will define a one-particle state as
Ip)
= at (p) 10)
(3.39)
This state contains one quantum of the field 4> with momentum pi' =
(Ep , p). Such states have positive norm, since
(3.40)
37
Ip(n))
(3.42)
(343)
Show that
1A",at'(k)l_ = a'(k),
1A",a(k)l_ = -a(k).
(3.44)
3.6
3.6.1
(3.45)
Let us decompose the complex scalar field into its real and imaginary
parts:
</>(x)
(3.46)
38
which
+ W2(p)),
alp) =
~(al(p) -
at(p) =
~(at(p) - ia~(p)),
at(p) =
~(at(p) + ia~(p))
(3.49) .
ia2(p)),
mean
(3.50)
We can now start with Eq. (3.18) for both 1 and 2 and use the
definition of Eq. (3.46) to write the Fourier expansion of the field :
(x) =
3
d p
(a(p)e- ip .X
)(27[)32Ep
+ at (p)e iP '
(3.51)
39
quanta of the fields (p, and (/>2 which are different, it is clear that there
are two different particles in the theory. Since Eq. (3.53) presents the
commutation relations in the form of Eq. (3.22), we can interpret at
and at to be the creation operators for these two particles. Of course,
3.6.2
t _ e"Ot,
(3.54)
ot = iqlJt .
(355)
So,
a~.
J~ = a(a~) (-.q)
= iq
a~.
+ a(a~t) (.q
t
)
[(~)t - wt)]
(3.56)
Q=
d3 x
JO
J
J
= q
d3 x iq [(ao)t - (aot)]
d3 p [at(p)a(p) - at(p)a(p)]
(3.57)
The first term here, remembering the definition of Eq. (3.43), is just
the number operator for the quanta created by at. Let us denote it
by N a Similarly, the second term is N. Thus we obtain
Q = q(Na
No.)
(3.58)
40
Notice the negative sign for the second term. If q is called the charye
associated with each quanta created by at, the first term is the total
charge in such quanta. The quanta created by ii t then possess an
opposite charge. These are called the antiparticles for the particles
which are created by at. Eq. (3.58) then tells us that the total
charge in particles and antiparticles is conserved as a consequence of
Noether's theorem.
Looking back at Eq. (3.51), we thus see that the operator "'(x)
can do two things. The first term describes the annihilation of a
particle, the second one the creation of an antiparticle. In either
case, if "'(x) operates on any state, it will reduce the charge of the
state by an amount q. Similarly, Eq. (3.52) implies that the operator
",t(x) can either create a particle, or annihilate an antiparticle. In
other words, if it operates on a state, the charge will increase by q.
One may wonder at this point as to how the quantity q is defined.
After all, in Eq. (3.54) where it first shows up, q is always multiplied
by B, so we can change the value of q by redefining B with a multiplicative constant. But there is nothing mysterious about this. Aft~r
all, any charge is defined only up to a multiplicative constant. For
example, take the case of electric charge. If we multiply the values
of the charges of all particles by a constant, the law of charge conservation will not be affected at all. The Maxwell's equations will also
be unaffected, since the electromagnetic fields will be multiplied by
the same constant. So, if we consider only one kind of particle in i~
lation, the value of the charge is really arbitrary. Only the ratios of
charges of different particles have some physical meaning, and these
ratios can be determined only when different kinds of particles are
present and there is some interaction among them. Such instances
will be encountered when we will discuss interactions in the later
chapters.
3.6.3
3.7. Propagator
41
for all p.
(3.59)
(3.60)
which will contain one antiparticle with energy Ep . The states with
more than one particles or antiparticles can be constructed similarly.
The normal-ordered Hamiltonian can now be written as
(3.61 )
Exercise 3.8 Find the Hamiltonian in terms of the field t:P 'Using
the Lagrangian of Eq. (3.45). Use the Fourier decomposition of the
jield giuen in Eq. (3.51) Qnd the 'Prescription of normal ordering to
express it in the Jorm oj Eq. (3.61).
3.7
Propagator
The goal of Quantum Field Theory is to describe particle interactions. Our interest will be in c81culating cross-sections, transition
probabilities, decay rates etc. For this, we need to know how parti-
(0 + m 2 ) (x) = J(x).
(3.62)
Since the Klein-Gordon equation is the same whether the scalar field
is real or complex, the discussion in this section is equally applicable
for both cases.
In order to solve this equation, we first introdnce a propagator, or
Green's function, denoted by G(x - x'), which satisfies the equation
(3.63)
42
4>(x) = 4>o(x) -
(3.64)
=!
G( x _ x ')
d p
(2,,)4 e
-;p.(x-x')G()
p ,
(3.65)
Remembering that
,j4(
x')
=!
d"p e-;p(x-x')
(2,,)4
'
(3.67)
G(p) =
1
2
P -m
1
2
(3.68)
3.7. Propagator
43
1
(pO)2 _ (Ep
+ 1.E. ,
i)2 '
(3.69)
i,)
,,-,--,-~I_-:-;-]
pO + (Ep
i,)
(3.70)
AF(x - x') =
d3p
-(2.. )3
e+'p-(z-z')
2Ep
[(PO-~p)+i' -
(pO+L)-i]
(3.71)
lim
_0 /
-00
e-i(t
de (+ IE. =
-21ri8(t),
(3.72)
where the 8-function was defined in Eq. (3.13). For the first term in
Eq. (3.70), we can shift to the variable pO' = pO - E p to perform the
pO-integration:
+00 dpot
-/ -00 27r
e-i(pOI +Ep)(t-t')
,.
pO + IE
= -i8(t - I').-'E,(,-,'}
(3.73)
_po - E PI which
(3.74)
44
d p
(21f)32Ep
lett _ t')e-'Ep(t-t')+'P'("-"')
+e(t' -
t)eiE,(t-t')+il>(,,-,,'l] . (3.75)
[e(t -
t')e-ip.(x-x'l
+8(t' _ t)eiP'(x-x')] ,
(3.76)
where now the components of the 4-vector pi' are not independent,
but are related by pO = E p .
Exercise 3.9 Show that tJ.p(x - x'), given in Eq. (3.76), .ati.jie.
the equation
= - .'(x - x').
(3.77)
This form can be easily related to the quantized fields. For the
sake of illustration, let us use the real scalar field. From Eq. (3.18),
we can write
J
-J
(x) 10) =
3
d p
at (p)e'PX 10)
2
J(21f)3 E p
3
d p
e'P'x Ip)
J(21f)32Ep
(3.78)
,
where Ip) is the one-particle state defined in Eq. (3.39). Notice that
the annihilation operator in (x) does not contribute here owing to
Eq. (3.32). On the other hand,
(Ol(x') =
d p'
e-'p'x' (p'l ,
J(21f)32Ep '
(3.79)
where only the annihilation operator part of the Fourier decomposition of (x') is important. Using the normalization of Eq. (3.40), we
thus obtain
3
(0 1(x')(x)1 0) =
d p
e'P'(x-x')
(3.80)
(21f)32Ep
3.7. Propagator
45
Thus, we can rewrite Eq. (3.76) in the following form using the field
operators:
itlF(X - x')
= 8(t -
t') (0 I>(x)>(x')i 0)
(3.81)
(3.82)
where &1 [... J implies a time-ordered product, which means that the
operator with the later time must be put to the left of the operator
with the earlier time. In general, for any two scalar operators A(x)
and B(x), the time-ordered product is defined as
&1 [A(x)B(x
_ { A(x)B(x')
B(x')A(x)
)J =
ift>t',
ift'>t.
(3.83)
Let us now see how the form given in Eq. (3.81) can be interpreted. First, suppose t < t', in which case only the second term
survives. From the expression in Eq. (3.78), we see that the operator
>(x) operating on the vacuum state to the right creates a particle at
time t. On the other hand, for (01 >(x'), as commented earlier, only
the annihilation operator part contributes, so this part describes the
annihilation of a particle at time t'. Thus the matrix element describes the amplitude of a particle being created at a time t, which
propagates in space-time and is annihilated at a later time t'. Similarly, if t > t', the first term of Eq. (3.81) describes the amplitude of
a particle being created at a time t', which propagates in space-time
and is annihilated at a later time t. This, in a sense, is the physical meaning of the propagator, which also shows why it should be
important in calculating the amplitudes of various processes involving particle interactions. After all, between interactions, the particles
just propagate in space-time! The mathematical formulation of these
comments will be the subject of Ch. 6.
Exercise 3.10 'or the comple:>: srotar jield, ShOUl that Eq. (3.76)
can be written as
it.F(X - x') = (Olg [>(x)>t(x')]
I0)
(3.84)
46
iLlp(x - x') =
<L8
(3.85)
Chapter 4
4.1
Dirac Hamiltonian
where H is the Hamiltonian operator and p is the operator for 3momentum. In coordinate space these operators can be written as
derivative operators, H = iBt, P = -iV, as we know from their
commutation properties. Dirac wanted an operator linear in the
components of momentum which would square to p2 + m 2 . But such
an operator cannot be constructed using only numbers and functions
as coefficients. So Dirac assumed that the square root of this equation
47
48
,0
=l<-rp+m),
(4.2)
where
as well as ~1 are constant matrices. Since H and p are
Hermitian operators, "Yo, and "Yo must be Hermitian matrices.
Let us now square both sides of Eq. (4.2). This gives
I
H2 =
pi
(4.3)
and p1 commute,
(4.4)
Since this must agree with Eq. (4.1), we obtain the following relations
for the ')'-matrices:
[')'O')'i,')'Oyt
= 26 ij ,
[')'o')",')'ot = 0,
(')'0)2=1.
. (4.5)
')'0,
+ ')'0')"
= [')", ')'ot = O.
(4.6) .
(4.7)
')'o')"')'0-yi + ')'0-yi')'o')', =
_')'i-yi _ -yi')'i
= _ [')",-yit = U ij . (4.8)
where g~" is the inverse metric, defined in Eq. (1.23). This is a matrix
equation, where an identity matrix is implicit in the right hand side.
49
(4.10)
(4.11)
There arc six of these matrices in four dimensions because of the
antisymmetry in the indices. They are related to the spin angular
momentum of fields obeying the. Dirac eqnation, or particles with
half-integer spin.
Next we define the matrix
(4.12)
where f.p.v>..p is the completely antisymmetric tensor in four dimensions. The interchange of any two indices introduces a factor of ( -1),
and n interchanges introduce a factor of (_1)n. It follows that f.p.v>..p
has only one independent component, which is usually normalized to
1. We shall choose aUf convention by setting
'0123 =
+1.
(4.13)
Some properties of the antisymmetric tensor are given in the Appendix. Note that for 'Ys, we do not make allY distinction between
the upper and the lower indices.
50
matrices
(4.14)
These can be thought of as a basis spanning a sixteen-dimensional
space of matrices. Therefore the matrices must be at least 4 x 4.
b",'y']+=o
JOT
all 1".
o Exercise 4.2
(4.15)
o Exercise 4.3
r,
can be
Larrr=O.
(4.16)
r=l
,,0,
Since
as well as the products
follows that
,,0,,',
This, along with the anticommutation relation of Eq. (4.9), are the
basic properties which define the ,,-matrices.
It is immediately clear that the specific form of the ,,-matrices is
not unique. Suppose we have a set of matrices b"} which satisfy
both Eqs. (4.9) and (4.18). For any unitary matrix U, another set
{'ii"), defined by
(4.19)
51
will also satisfy the same equations. The converse of this statement
happens to be true as well. If two sets of matrices "'I" and "I" satisfy
Eq. (4.9), it can be shown that there exists a constant 4 x 4 matrix
M such that
(4.20)
We will not prove this statement. But once it is assumed, it is easy
to see that since in addition the matrices "'I" and "I" both satisfy the
hermiticity condition of Eq. (4.18), the matrix M has to be unitary.
We will not use any explicit representation of the ')'-matrices since
one representation is as good as any other. The only exception will
be made in 4.3.2, where a specific form will be assumed just for the
sake of constructing some explicit solutions.
4.2
Dirac equation
+ m) ",(x).
(4.21)
(i",!"8" - m) "'(x)
= o.
(4.22)
for
(4.23)
where "YJJ = gp.,/"t In this notation, the Dirac equation takes the
form
(~-
m)"'(x) = O.
(4.24)
52
;[,(x)
= U,p(x).
(4.25)
(4.27)
,p'(x')
= S(A),p(x).
(4.28)
(4.31 )
wherew~v
S(A)
= 1 - ~}3~vw~v ,
(4.32)
53
S-l(A) = 1 + !..{3~"w~".
4
(4.33)
Putting these into Eq. (4.30) and keeping only first order terms in
w~" , we find
(4.34)
{3~" = u~" =
2 h~,'Y"1- .
(4.35)
o Exercise 4.4 Using tlte "'(-matrix algebra 01 Eq. (4.9), ~erily tltat
tlte matrices def\ned in Eq. (4.35) do indeed satis/y Eq. (4-34).
[Hint: First sltow that lA, BCI_ = [A,BI+C - B[A,C +.1
Thus for infinitesimal transformations, the Dirac equation is c0variant if,p transforms by the !11atrix given in Eq. (4.32), with the
matrices {3~" given by Eq. (4.35). Finite Lorentz transformations
can be obtained by exponentiating Eq. (4.31). The corresponding
transformation rule for ,p is
(-~u~"w~") 1/J(x).
(4.36)
Objects defined in space-time are classified as scalars, vectors, tensors, etc. according to their Lorentz transformation propert~es. Here
we find a new class of objects - column vectors whose components
mix among themselves according to Eq. (4.36). Such objects are
called spinors (even if they do not satisfy the Dirac equation).
The angular momentum operators J~" generate the transformations
(4.37)
1/J'(x') = 1/J'(x)
+ w~"x"a~1/J'(x).
(4.38)
54
Chapter 4.
Using the linearized forms of Eqs. (4.36) and (4.37) for infinitesimal
lI
wlJwe obtain
I
(4.39)
The first term is the familiar expression for the orbital angular momentum, but there is also a second term. This shows that the solutions of Dirac equation carries some intrinsic angular momentum, or
spm.
Exercise 4.6 Suppose there exists a matrix C which ha.s the prop-
erty tltnt
C - 1"(p C = -
T
"tJI
j or a II 11,.
(4.40)
o Exercise 4.7 Using th.e a1\ticommutation retation oj the "(ma.trices, prove the following contraction fOTmulas:
1'1'=4,
= -2"11-"
'Y)..'YIJ.'YII"Y>' = 4g jw ,
"'/>''''(1'''(>'
1'1"1"1.1' = -21p1"1,.
4.3
4.3.1
(4.42)
55
solution would be of the form e- iE'. From Eq. (4.22) we see that the
eigenvalue E should satisfy the equation
(4.43)
However, (,,(0)2 = 1, as we have seen, so the eigenvaiues of the matrix
"(0 can be + 1 or -1. Thus we obtain the solution of the eigenvalue
equation to be
E=m.
(4.44)
There will be two independent eigenvectors for each sign of the energy, as should be expected since 1/J, being a 4-component object, can
have four independent solutions.
Thus both positive and negative eigenvalues will occur in a single
particle interpretation of the Dirac equation. For a general value of
the 3-momentum p, let us represent solutions in the form
u,(p)e- ip ."
1/J(x) ~ { v,(p)e+ ip ., ,
(4.45)
up to normalization factors, where the index s labels the two independent solutions of each kind. The positive energy u-solutions correspond to a particle with momentum p and energy E p = + J p 2 + m 2 ,
whereas the negative energy v-solutions correspond to a particle with
momentum -p and energy -Ep =
p2 + m2
Putting Eg. (4.45) into Eq. (4.22), we can see that the spinors
satisfy the relations
_J
(p- m)u,(p) = 0,
(p+m)v,(p) =0.
(4.46)
Using this definition and Eq. (4.18), it is easy to see that Eg. (4.46)
can also be written as
u,(p) (p-m) = 0,
v,(p) (p+m) =
o.
(4.48)
56
The normalization of the spinors has not been specified yet. Let
us now fix them with the conditions
o.
(4.49)
Exercise 4.8 Multiply tne u-equation oj Eq. (4.46) jrom tlte lejt
bllli:y~
'YllU
(4.50)
JOT'
(4.51)
=
0, while Eq.
Exercise 4.9 Use the same technique to show a. mol'. general idenlilll. where the spinol'S on the two sides coTiespond to different momentcl. This leads to
(4.52)
2m
0.
similar
I>,(p)u,(p) =
p + m,
L, v,(p)ii,(p) =
P-
7Il.
0.
row
and so is vv.
(4.53)
(Hint: Take, for example, the first equation. Appl-y the matrices on
hoth sides on the fouT' basis spinol'S and show that the T'esults are the
same. If both sides act similo:rtll 01\ aU the basis spinors, thell must
act the same 'Wall on an1l spinor and thuefore must be the same
matrix.]
4.3.2
57
0=
"l. (0
(I0 -I0 )
a
_u i 0
(4.54)
'
where I is the 2 x 2 unit matrix and the ai's are the Pauli matrices:
1
q=
(0 1)
10
, ( 72=
(0 -i)
iO
a3 =
(1 0)
0 -1
(4.55)
p-
m = -roEp - 'Y' P - m = (E - m
U'p
'
P ),
p-m
(4.56)
_ (tP,)
=
tPb '
(4.57)
where tP, and tPb are the top two and the bottom two components
respectively, we obtain the following equations for them using Eq.
(4.46):
(Ep-m)tP,-u'PtPb = 0
uPtP,-(Ep+m)tPb = O.
(4.58)
These are two homogeneous equations with two unknowns, and s0lutions exist since the determinant of the co-efficients is zero, which
can be seen by explicit calculation.
We can now use anyone of the equations in Eq. (4.58) to relate tP,
and tPb. Using the second one, we get
up
+ m tPt
tPb = E
(4.59)
58
Thus, there can be two independent solutions since 4>, is a twocomponent column vector. Let us choose the independent solutions
for 4>, to be proportional to
JE +
p
m (
CT
.x; ),
Ep+m
(4.61)
where the preflltor has been put in so that our solutions comply
with the normalization condition of Eq. (4.49).
Similarly, we can find the solutions for the v-spinors, which are
(4.62)
These solutions also have been normalized llcording to Eq. (4.49).
The mismatch of subscripts on the two sides is a conventional choice,
which we will discuss again in 4.6.
o Exercise 4.12 Another 'Wo:y of finding the explicit solutions is to
solue. first in the rest frame, where pP = (m,O). In this frame, we
0011. chooa- the independent solutions to be of th.e following form:
u+{O) = V2m
v+(O) = V2m
(~)
(D
u_(O) = V2m
(D '
v_ (0) = V2m (
~l )
(4.63)
DiTac~
Pauli
TepTe8enta~
4.4
59
Projection operators
4.4.1
FO.I example, if we are interested in states of either positive or negative energy, but not both, we can use the energy projection operators
A(p) =
p2m
+m .
(4. 6)
4
For any two vectors a and b, the anticommutation relation of "(matrices imply the relation
~~ =
In particular, when a
= b,
2a . b -
N.
(4.65)
this implies
#=a 2 .
(4.66)
(4.67)
Using Eq. (4.46), we see that the plane wave solutions of positive
and negative energy which we found are eigenstates of these energy
projection operators,
A+(p)us(p)
A_(p)vs(p)
= us(p) ,
= vs(p),
(4.68)
A+(p)vs(p)
= A-(p)us(p) = O.
(4.69)
us(p)A+(p)
vs(p)A_(p)
= us(p) ,
= vs(p),
(4.70)
60
as well as
(4.71)
4.4.2
Another useful pair are the helicity projection operators. The spin
of a Dirac fermion, when measured along any direction, can be either + or - in units of ~h. A special direction is the direction of
motion of the fermion (except in its rest frame, of course). The spin
measured along the direction of motion is called helicity, and the helicity projection operators project out states of positive and negative
helicities.
We have noted in Eq. (4.39) that ~a~" is the spin operator for
fermions. Let us therefore define a 3-vector
(4.72)
Next we project this operator along the direction of motion of the
fermion,
Ep
This has eigenvalues
+ 1 and
Ep
(4.73)
=--
-1.
II(p) =
21 (1 E p )
(4.74)
(4.76)
61
Exercise 4.15 ShOUl that, for arbitral" direction of the 3momentum, the spinoTs which aTC simultaneous eigenstates of A
and I1 are given by Eqs. (1,.61) and (4.62), Ulhere X are given not
by Eq. (4.60), but by
x+ - /2p(p + p,)
x-
y'2p(P+P,)
( P + 1', )
+ i1'y ,
-1', + i1'y )
PI
P+p,
(4.78)
(4.76).
2(1 -
1'5) ,
(4.79)
62
These are called the chirality projection operators. These turn out
to be closely related to the helicity projection operators, because in
the limit m --+ 0, the helicity projection operators become chirality
projection operators,
(4.80)
Exercise 4.18 Show that it is imiosSible to find (l linea,. combination oj the uspinors of Eq. (1. 61 th.at would be a.n eigensta.te oj
')'5, unless the jennion is massless. Furth.er, for a massless jennio1\,
ShOUl that the eigensto.tes oj 1'5 are identical to the heLicit'll eigenslales.
As mentioned earlier, helicity projection operators project out definite spin projections along the direction of the 3-momentum of a
particle. They are therefore useless for a definite spin projection of
a particle at rest. For that one needs different projection operators.
Suppose we want to project the spin states for a certain spatial
direction denoted by the unit 3-vector s. For this, first let us define
a 4-vector nJl. whose components are given by
n
p' s
= --,
m
(p. s)p
s + m(E + m) ,
(4.81)
63
particle, n P = (0, s), so that rj. = /'1. Using the definition of /'s from
Eq. (4.12), we get /'srj. = 1)'0/,2/,3 = /'<1 23 = /'E 1 , where the 3vector E was defined in Eq. (4.72). This commutes with the spin
operator in the x-direction, El, so the eigenstates of this operator
are eigenstates of E' as well. In other words, for this choice of s,
the eigenstates of /'srf. have well-defined spin components along the
x-direction in the rest frame of the particle. The operators given
above project out the two possible values of the spin component.
o Exercise 4.21 Prouc the same thing, without taking a.ny e~Licit
fonn for the Dira.c matrices and spinal'S. [Hint: u(O) and v(O) are
eigenstates oj /'0, which joHows jrom Eq. (446).1
4.5
(4.85)
(4.86)
The left hand side is zero since the Lagrangian contains no terms
with a derivative of ,p. Thus we obtain Eq. (4.22).
1
64
l/>(il/+m)=O,
(4.87)
'Where the left-o.TToW sign on the den'lJo.ti\lc implies that the deriua.
liue should opera.te on things to its left. The.n ta.king the heT'11\itian
conjugate of this equa.tion and using the properties of the ')'-mo.trices,
ShOUl that it is the sa.me equ.a.tion as that gi'ven in Eq. (4.22).
(;1/'''8,,1)t = -i(8"1)t/,,,t/'o1
= -i(8,,1h"l/>,
(4.88)
8" G1/J'l'''1/J)
(4.90)
(4.91)
for which the Noether current is
j" = q1/J'l'"1/J .
(4.92)
65
Q= q
d x 1/r'l"", = q
d x ",t",.
(4.93)
Exercise 4.24
(4.94)
'Wher. PIJ is the momentum opera.tor. A theorem then states that,
for pa.rticles which are eigenstates of momentum a.nd a.ngula.r momentum,
(4.95)
where s is called the spin oj the -pa.rticle. Using the e:r:pression jar J,..v
from Eq. (4.39), show that the spin of a. particle satisfying the Dira.c
equa.tion is ~. IHint: The contra.ction formulas of the antisllmmetric
tensor are gi"en in the Appendh.]
4.6
We now Fourier decompose the Dirac field as we did with the scalar
field in the last chapter. As with the scalar field, we write the Dirac
field as an integral over momentum space of the plane wave solutions,
with creation and annihilation operators a::; coefficients,
"'(x)
JJ
d p
(27T)32Ep
(fs(p)us(p)e- iPX
+ fl(p)vs(p)e iPX ) .
s=I,2
(4.96)
Of course, this also implies
"'(x) =
JJ
3
d p
(27T)32E p
(f!(p)us(p)ei"X
+ f.,(p)vs(p)e- iPX )
s=I.2
(4.97)
H =
=
3
6L
d x.
Ii"'Q(x)
"'Q(x) - L
d x "'( -i-y . V
+ m)"',
(4.98)
66
(-y. p + m)u,(p)e- ip .x
= '"YoEpu, (p)e- ip .x ,
+ m)u,(p)e- ip .x =
(-i'y . V
(4.99)
using the definition of the u-spinors from Eq. (4.46) at the last step.
Similarly,
(4.100)
Substituting these in Eq. (4.98) and using "'"Yo = u l and "'"Yo = vI,
we obtain
J d J P'J
3
H =
x
2(271')3
:L
d3
d3
fK x
PYE;
(J;,(pl)u;,(p')eiP'X
+ f.,(pl)v;,(p')e-iP'x)
s,s'=1,2
(4.101)
Notice that the cross terms , Le., the ones involving utv and vtu!
vanish due to the normalization conditions from Eq. (4.49). The
other two terms give
H =
d3p Ep
:L
[f!(p)f,(p) - f,(p)fl(p)] .
(4.102)
.'1=1,2
[f,(p),f;,(pl)t
[f,(p), iJ,(pl)t
= O,,'03(p -
p'), (4.103)
while all other anticommutators are zero. And we define normal ordering for fermionic operators by saying that whenever we encounter
products of them, we shall put the annihilation operators to the right
and creation operators to the left as if the anticommutators were zero.
67
d 3 pEp L.,
(4.104)
5=1.2
(4.105)
whereas aU other anticommuto.toTS vanish.
COT1.SCMJed
0.
Dira.c j\eld.
(4.106)
o Exercise 4.27 There (lTe different con'Uentiolls regarding the normalization faT the spinoTs. One can use 0. quu.ntit'Y N J in place
oj 2Ep on the right ha.nd side oj the norm.atizution equa.tions, Eq.
(4.49). Moreover, one can define the anticommutation relations of
Eq. (4.103) with an extra factor oj N 2 on the right hand side, and
use a jactor N 3 instead of 2Ep under the square root sign in the denominator of the Fourier expansion in Eq. (4.96). Show that these
quantities must be related b-y
N,N, = N3
(4.107)
= q
d3 x :",1",:
d p
[I!(plI,(p) -1!(p)!.(p)]
(4.108)
3=1,2
Just as in the case of complex scalar fields, we see that the Noether
charge for the particles created by II is opposite to the charge of
those created by ft. The latter are therefore antiparticles of the
former ones.
68
Chapter 4.
fl(p)fl(p)
= l1(p)l1(p) = 0.
(4.109)
We can also define the Fock space for fermions by starting with
the definition of the vacuum as
f,(p) 10) = 0,
f,(p) 10) =
(4.110)
(4.111)
These imply that both fi(k) and fi(k) create positive energy states,
a particle in the first case and an antiparticle in the second. In
particular, fi(k) 10) is a one-particle state, and [,1(k) 10) is a oneantiparticle state.
j,l(k) =
J
J
d3x e-ikxu~(k)..p(x),
d 3x
e-ikXv~(k)..p(x).
(4.112)
r
4.7. Propagator
69
its commutation with the field operator can be easily derived from
Eq. (4.106) to be
(4.114)
since the orbital angular momentum part in Jpv does not contribute
to J k . Here E k is the helicity operator, defined in Eq. (4.73). The
corresponding commutators with j,(k) and J;.(k) can then be obtained by using the two relations in Eq. (4.112). For example, the
second of these relations gives
[J;.(k),J k ]
=~
2 )(2,,)32E.
(4.116)
4r in the direction of
This l in hindsight, is
T.
the rationale for the convention of choosing the subscripts on the vspinors to be opposite to their helicity: v+ 1 for example, has negative
helicity, but the subscript is governed by the fact that the creation
operator that accompanies it in the Fourier expansion of Eq. (4.96)
in fact creates a positive-helicity antiparticle state from the vacuum.
The helicities of particle states can be calculated in the same way.
D Exercise 4.28 ShoUl that f~(k) crea.tes a. particle state 01 helicit'Y
r.
4.7
Propagator
time. We proceed as we did for the scalar field and write the Dirac
equation coupled to a source:
(i-y~8~
- m) "'(x)
= J(x) ,
(4.117)
(i-y~a:; -
m) S(x -
x')
= o'(x - x').
(4.118)
70
.p(x) = 1/Jo(x)
(4.119)
S(x - x') =
d p e-ip.(x-x')S(p)
(21T)4
.
(4.120)
(p- m)S(p) = 1.
Multiplying both sides by
(4.121)
p + m, we obtain
(4.122)
p+m
SF(P) _
- p2 _ m 2 + is'
(4.123)
SF(p) =
p -m +.,
2
(4.124)
directly from Eq. (4.121), which should be taken to mean the same
thing as Eq. (4.123).
If we put the Fourier transform obtained in Eq. (4.123) into Eq.
(4.120), we get
d p e -ip(x-x') 2 P+ 2m
(21T)4
P - m + is
= (~+ m)6F(x - x'),
') =
S FX-X
(
(4.125)
4.7. Propagator
71
where 6.F(X - x') is the propagator for the scalar fields derived in
Eq. (3.76). This gives
S (
, F X
') =
X
d p
(21r)32E
(4.128)
Like the propagator for the complex scalar field, the propagator in
Eq. (4.127) describes either a particle going from (t',x') to (t,x), or
an antiparticle going from (t,x) to (t',x').
o Exercise 4.29 Derive Eq. (4.126) !rom Eq. (4.125).
o Exercise 4.30
Chapter 5
72
73
5.1
Examples of interactions
.>!int
_p.q,3 -
),q,4 -
),(n)4>n .
(5.1 )
n?:5
Here f.J, A etc are some constants which are called coupling constants,
Le.} their values determine how strong the relevant interactions are.
We have lumped all the terms with more than four powers of 4>
together under the summation sign. This is because the coupling
constants in these terms have negative mass dimensions. Such cou-
Exercise 5.1 Show that the mass dimension oj Ute coupling constant A(n) is 4 - n.
.>!int
= -
L
n~2
),(2n)
(4)' q,
(5.2)
If we have only spinor fields in a theory, our choices are much more
restricted. This is because the spinors transform non-trivially under
Lorentz transformations 1 and we must make combinations which are
Lorentz invariant. A product of an odd number of spinor fields cannot be Lorentz invariant. Thus the first nOll-trivial combination will
74
have four fermion fields. We can also have more than four if we so
wish.
There can be many types of 4-fermion interactions. For example,
we can write an interaction of the form
(5.3)
However, there are other possibilities. For example, we can also write
(5.4)
or
(5.5)
We can also make combinations using ,5, e.g.:
(5.6)
and 50 on. One combination which played a crucial role in the development of weak interaction theory is
(5.7)
The fields denoted by ,p in these equations need not refer to the same
fermion field. For example, suppose we want to describe nuclear beta
decay in which a neutron decays into a proton, an electron and an
electron-antineutrino. In this ease, the last equation turns out to be
successful in explaining experimental data provided we replace the
four .,p-operators as follows:
75
that involve only the ~terms or only the ,p-terms, we can have other
interaction terms which involve both 4> and 1/;. For example, we can
have
.5!int
= -
h,p,p</> .
(5.9)
Exercise 5.2 ShOUl that, foT' the inte.raction Lagrangia.n to be hermitia.n, the coupling consta.nt h in Eq. (5.9) has to be renl, and hi
in. Eq. (5.10) ha.s to be pu.relll ima.ginary.
5.2
Evolution operator
If for a given system we could find all the quantum states we would
be able to exactly predict the behavior of the system from its initial
conditions. In other words, given an initial state Ii) consisting of
76
some particles with given quantum numbers we would know all the
possible states If) it could evolve into, along with the amplitudes
of transition. Unfortunately, apart from a few and almost always
unrealistic exceptions, it is not possible to find the eigenstates of a
Hamiltonian if the fields in it interact with each other. Therefore,
given a theory, we separate the Hamiltonian into a part which we
can solve exactly and another which we cannot,
H= Ho+HI.
(5.11)
:t
(5.12)
(5.13)
Let us now define two different evolution operators Uo(t) and U(t)
such that
IllIo(t)) = Uo(t) 1111 0(-00)) - Uo(t) Ii) ,
IIlI(t)) = Uo(t)U(t)UJ(t) IllIo(t)) .
(5.14)
77
= Uo(t)U(t) Ii)
II\1(t))
(5.15)
We can write Eq. (5.13), which is Schriidinger's equation for the free
system, as
(5.16)
By considering a complete set of states at t
this into an operator equation,
= -00,
we can convert
(5.17)
which implies
Uo(t) =
e-'Hot ,
(5.18)
i ~ II\1(t))
(5.19)
i :t II\1(t))
= i ~ (Uo(t)U(t))
(i
Ii)
dU
Ii)
(5.20)
(5.21)
So we can now equate the two sides, and going to a complete set of
initial states (at t = -00) as before, we can write Eq. (5.19) as an
operator equation,
HoUo(t)U(t)
dU(t)
+ Uo(t)i dt
= HoUo(t)U(t)
+ HIUO(t)U(t). (5.22)
78
The first term on the left cancels the first term on the right, and
multiplying both sides by Ud(t), we get
id~;t) = Ud(t)H/Uo(t)U(t)
= H[(t)U(t),
(5.23)
where
(5.24)
Let us try to understand the meaning of H / (t). The Hilbert space on
which both sides of Eq. (5.23) act is the set of states which we had
denoted by Ii} earlier. Let us denote the basis vectors in this space
by 1,6}. These are then the time-independent free states of definite
quantum numbers. If we now look at the matrix elements of H/(t}
between these basis states, we find that
(5.25)
Uo(t) 1f3}
= 1f3, t}
(5.26)
the time-dependent free state into which 1f3} would have evolved at
time t had there been no interactions. So the matrix elements of
H/(t) between time-independent basis states are equal to those of
HI between the corresponding time-dependent free states. In other
words, RI(t) is the interaction Hamiltonian Hll now written in terms
of free fields at time t. Sometimes this is referred to as the 'interaction
Hamiltonian in the interaction picture'. Eq. (5.23) is solved by an
integral equation,
t
U(t)
U(to) -
r dtl H/(tIlU(tIl.
Jto
(5.27)
Now we make an assumption, that the states 1f3} are also a complete set of eigenstates for the full Hamiltonian Hast ~ -00. In
other words, HI ---t 0 as t -+ -00. We could think of this as saying
that all fields are free fields in the remote past, and the interactions
79
(5.28)
This is an exact equation obeyed by U(t), but is useless in this form
because of the presence of U(t]) on the right hand side. We can
obtain a solution iteratively if we replace the U(tIl on the right hand
side by Eq. (5.28). This gives
This can be written in a mu~h nicer form if we use the time-ordered products of operators. For example, take the term in the
sum with n = 2. Note that
(5.31)
The first term is obtained for tt > t2, and the second for t2 > tl.
Now, by interchanging the dummy variables tl and t2 in the second
integral and adding up the two integrals, this reduces to
(5.32)
80
Similarly, the higher terms can also be rewritten in terms of timeordered products, and the perturbative solution for U(I) can be writ! ten as
U(t) = I + ~
00
(-i)"
n!
l' l'
-00
dt]
_oo
r'
(5.33)
Time ordering of n operators has the ohviO\IS meaning that any operator appears to the right of all other 0IH'ratvl's at later times. One
sometimes writes U{/.) in the morc compact. fonn
U(I.) = 5" [ex p
(5.34)
5.3
S-matrix
TiJ(' S-Illatrix is
s=
df~fil1t'd a~
,~~~ U(I)
the lilllit
='7
(5.35)
5.3. S-mat6x
81
Since
(5.36)
where xO = t on the right hand side, we can also write the definition
of the S-matrix in a neater form:
S = g [ex p
(5.37)
We have already shown in Eq. (5.14) that U(t) i, unitary for any t.
Thus the S-matrix is unitary:
SSI = SIS = 1.
(5.38)
t~ (1 IUd(tjUo(t)U(tll i)
t~~ U IU(t)i i)
U lSI i)
, (5.39)
82
Chapter 5. The
, S-matrix expansion
(5.41 )
= lim (,8IU(t)I"') ,
'-00
(5.42)
5.4
Wick's theorem
83
like to get bock from time ordered products to normal ordered products. For this, we need a relation between the two. This relation is
provided by Wick's theorem.
Consider first the simple example of the time-ordered product of
two foctors of a scalar field. Remember the definition given in Eq.
(3.83), which can be written as
g [4>(x)4>(x')]
= e(t -
t')4>(x)4>(x')
+ e(t' -
t)4>(x')4>(x). (5.43)
Our task reduces to writing the simple products on the right hand
side in terms of normal ordered products. To this end, let us write
4>(x)
(5.44)
where the 4>+ contains the annihilation operator and the 4>- contains
the creation operator. They are thus shorthands for the two terms
appearing in Eq. (3.18). Because of the definition of the vocuum
state in Eq. (3.32), we can write
(014)_ (x)
=0
(5.45)
Now,
4>(x)4>(x') = 4>+(x)4>+(x') + 4>+(x)4>_ (x')
+4>_(x)4>+(x') + 4>-(x)4>_(x').
(5.46)
(5.48)
(0 14>(x)4>(x')1 0)
= (01
[4>+(x),4>-(x')L
10) ,
(5.49)
84
since the extra term introduced in the process vanishes anyway owing
to Eq. (5.45). However, since the commutator appearing on the right
side is a number, its vacuum expectation value is the number itself.
Thus we can write
(0 1(x)(x')1 0)
(5.50)
= [+(x), _(x')]_
+ (0 1(x)(x')1 0)
:(x)(x'):
(5.51)
.'7 [(x)(x')]
since 8(t - t')
+ 8(t' -
:(x)(x'):
+ (01.'7
[(x)(x')]IO),
(5.52)
:(x')(x): .
On the right side here, we have the vacuum expectation value of
the time-ordered product of two field operators. Since such quantities
will appear often in the ensuing discussion, it is useful to develop a
compact notation for them. Such quantities are usually called Wick
contractions and are denoted by the following symbol:
= (x)(x')
~
(5.53)
Thus, Eq. (5.52) can be rewritten with the help of this notation in
the form
+ (x)(x')
(5.54)
More generally when the two fields appearing in the prod net are
not necessarily the same, we will write
.'7 [<I>(x)<I>'(x')]
:<I>(x)<I>'(x'):
+ <I>(x)<I>'(x')
(5.55)
o Exercise 5.3 Show that for two jermionic. operators 1/J(X) and
1J;'(x')' although Ute definition oj the time-ordered pro<luct has a negati\le sign Jar one oj the tfTms, one still obtains Eq. (5.55) since the
commutators also get replaced by anticommutnt01'!:I.
5.4.
Wick's theorem
85
(x!l(X2)
,
,
="iC>F(X,
- X2) ,
(xtlt
(X2) = t(x2)(xIl
= iC>F(XI - X2),
,
,
"
'fo(xIl'f~(x2)
= -'f~(X2)'fo(x!l
Wick's theorem can be generalized to any number of field operators by multiplying on the right by a field and considering the
interchanges required to change from a time ordered product to a
normal ordered product. The theorem is then proven by induction.
The result is
+ [:tj'2
+
.
+
+ perm]
t14 <1>5'"
<I>, <1>2
LJ
{ 4> 1ef>2
l.-
<l>n:
<l>n:
+ penn]
-+- perm]
L--.J
... 4>n-2<1>n-1
I
4>n
if n is even,
perm] if n is odd.
(5.57)
A few words about the notation used in writing up this result. All
possible pairs are contracted, first one pair, then two pairs, and so on
until we run out of pairs to contract. The word 'perm I occurring here
means permutations on all fields present. The formula is long. So,
in order to save space, we have omitted the ~pace-time points corresponding to the field operators. It is to be understood that the field
4>1 is a function of the space-time point XlI and so on. The contractions are shown within the normal-ordered product~. However, since
the contractions are not field operators but rat.her the vacuum expectation values of some combinations of them, they should be treated
as numbers and can therefore be written outside the normal-ordering
symbol as well.
86
[~(xtl ~(xn)J
=g
~+(Xr)
->
~+(x~ - ,,,Xr ) ,
~_(xr)
->
~_(x~+,,,Xr).
(5.59)
'r
(5.60)
Chapter 6
2lnt
= -
ht/J1JJ1> .
(6.1)
We will consider specific initial and final states, and in each case
see which terms in the S-matrix expansion can give non-zero contribution to the relevant S-matrix element. An alternative approach
could involve considering a specific order in the S-matrix expansion
and investigate which processes it can contribute to. This approach
will be taken later in the book for Quantum Electrodynamics.
6.1
Let the quantum of the field 1> be denoted by B, since the particle is
a boson. The quanta of the fermionic field 1JJ will be called electrons.
Of course, the mathematical results that follow will not depend on
whether the quanta of t/J are electrons or some other spin- ~ particle.
We give the names only to avoid cumbersome sentences when we
explain what is going on.
Let us denote the mass of the particle B by M and the mass of
the electron by m. Suppose M > 2m, so that kinematically it is
possible to have the B particle decay into all electron-positron pair.
87
88
(6.2)
where k, p, p' are the 4-momenta of the particles. Our objective is to
calculate the S-matrix elements for this process.
The Hamiltonian derived from the Lagrangian will also have the
usual free terms, minus the interaction Lagrangian. This is obviously
true for all theories without derivative interactions. It also happens
to be true if derivative interactions are present. For the fermionscalar interaction,
.n} = h :1/np: .
(6.3)
= g
= -ih
a'x :1/njJ: .
(6.4)
In the last step, we have omitted the time-ordering sign, since in this
case, there is only one space-time point involved and so there is just
one time. Consequently, Wick's theorem is not needed here - we
already have the normal ordered product.
It will be convenient at this point if we use the notation of Eq.
(5.44) and a similar one fot the "'-field, where the creation and the
annihilation parts of the field operator are denoted separately. Thus
for the "'-field, the 1/J+ part will contain the annihilation operator for
the electron and the "'_ part will contain the creation operator for
the positron. Similarly, in "', the part containing the annihilation
operator for the positron will be denoted by 1/J+, and the part containing the creation operator for the electron is 1/J_. The subscript is
what we get for the sign of E when we act on the Fourier transform
by the energy operator ia/at. A good mnemonic for this notation is
that the subscripted sign on the field operator is the negative of the
sign in the exponential factor appearing in the Fourier decomposition
of the field operator. Using these notations, we can write
6.1.
89
-ih
dx1/l_1/I_1>+.
(6.6)
In writing this form, we have put the operators in the normal ordered form anyway, so we have omitted the normal-ordering symbol.
All the field operators pertain to the space-time point x. Thus the
annihilation of B occurs at the same point in space-time where the
electron-positron pair is created. Pictorially, this can be represented
by the diagram in Fig. 6.1.
B(k) <e-(p)
........
e+( -p')
Figure 6.1: Feynman diagram for Smatrix element coming from Eq. (6.6),
This diagram is a trivial example of what are called Feynman
diagrams. This one has three lines, representing the initial and final
particles. They meet at a point, called a vertex, where the fields
interact. In order to distinguish the scalar field from the fermions,
we have used a dashed line for the scalar field and solid lines for the
ferrrions.
90
The arrow on an electron line will always point to the future, Le.,
to the right. The arrow on a positron line will always point to the
past, I.e., to the left. Since momentum always points from the past to
the future, it follows that for the electron, momentum flows along the
arrow, whereas for the positron, momentum flows against the arrow.
In addition, we have put a minus sign in the positron momentum.
So, in the diagram, the positron appears to be going into the vertex
with a momentum -P/, which means it is in fact leaving the vertex
with a momentum p'.
The convention on time's direction varies from one book to another. In fact, if the lines are labeled as e+ or e-, the arrows are
not needed to decide which one is electron and which one is positron.
Then one can dispense with time's direction altogether and put the
arrow in the direction of the momentum. However, an additional
advantage of fixing a direction for the flow of time is that charge
conservation is automatically ensured at each vertex if the arrow is
made continuous. Therefore, and for ease of understanding, we shall
allow a little redundancy and do both. We shall label the lines as e+
or e-, as well as take time to flow from left to right.
The value of the matrix element obtained from this term will be
discussed in 6.3. For now, let us just try to see which other terms
have non-zero contributions to the process of Eq. (6.2). Let us look at
the second order term in the S-matrix expansion. Here we will have
two factors of the interaction Hamiltonian. These factors will contain
six field operators. Of them, we need three to annihilate the initial
particle and create the final ones. That leaves us wi th three more.
Since this is an odd number, all these remaining operators cannot
be combined into contractions. In the Wick expansion, we will have
terms which have one I or all three of these remaining operators sitting
outside the contractions. When we take the matrix element I these
terms will vanish. Extending this argument, one can show that the
matrix elements for this process will vanish for all even powers of
this interaction Hamiltonian.
The first non-trivial corrections to the amplitude obtained with
S(1) appear in S(3), the term with three factors of the interaction
91
S(3)
(_;~)3
J Jd" Jd"
d"xl
x2
x3
(6.7)
92
+ :(V"/Jr/J)XI
(V"/Jr/J)x,
(1/J1/Jr/J)X3:
I
I I
' I
I
+ (1/Jtr/J)"
(rtf)x,
(1/J1/Jf)x3
+ :(1/J1/Jr/J)XI (1/J1/Jr/J)x,
(1/J1/Jr/J)X3:
II
I' I
(6.8)
In the normal-ordered factor, the only term which gives a nOnzero matrix element for the process in question is given by
(6.11)
as we argued just before Eq. (6.6). The spinor indices have been
raised only for convenience, and are equivalent to lower indices. Thus
the boson B is annihilated at the point x" the electron is created
at X2. and the positron is created at X3. Also, from Eqs. (6.10) and
(5.56), we find that there is a scalar propagator between X2 and X3,
and two fermion propagators, one from x I to X2, and another from
X3 to x ,. All these statements can be pictorially represented by the
Feynman diagram of Fig. 6.2a.
Notice that the contractions now appear as internal lines of this
diagram. By this, we mean lines which do not represent the particles
in the ini tial state or the final state. For example, the contraction of
r/J(X2)r/J(X3) is now represented by a dashed line which runs between X2
_.~
(a)
X3
(,I
e+( _pi)
'i"'~; ,-(,I
X2
._---~----
B(k)
Figure 6.2:
Xl
93
o <
e-(p)
1!_(kJ_(b)
X3
e+(-p')
(dl t:/>h>'1
X2
.. _..
B(k)
~._.-
e+( _pi)
Xl
e-(p)
of Eq. (6.8).
and X3. Similarly, there are two internal fermion lines, one between
Xl and X2, and another between X3 and Xl' These internal lines
appear as propagators in the evaluation of the S-matrix element.
An internal scalar line represents the contraction between two
-operators at two space-time points. For an internal fermion line,
however, the situation is slightly different, because here the contraction is between the ,p-operator at one point and the ,p-operator at
another. As we know, the propagator represents a particle being
created at one space-time point.and annihilated at another. We can
indicate the points of creation and annihilation in the diagram itself,
by putting an arrow on the internal line which points towards the end
where the ,p-operator occurs. For example, from Eq. (6.10), we see
that for the fermion line between Xl and X2, we have the ,p-operator
at X2 and the ,p-operator at Xl. Consequently, we have put an arrow
pointing from Xl to X2 on the fermion line ill Fig. 6.2a. Similarly,
for the other internal fermion line in this diagram, the direction of
the arrow is from X3 to Xl. This rule automatically maintains the
continuity of arrows on the fermion lines.
Let us now move on to the next term in Eq. (6.8). Here we have
an internal fermion line going from Xl to X2, but there is also one
coming back from X2 to Xl. Therefore, the Feynman diagram has
a fermion loop as shown in Fig. 6.2b. We also find a B propagator
between X2 and X3. Note that the arrow convention is valid only for
the initial and final particles - internal particles may be neither in
the past nor in the future of one another.
94
Figure 6.3: Feynman diagram representing the last term of Eq. (6.8).
The last term remains to be discussed. It is pictorially represented in Fig. 6.3. As is clear from the diagram, this term represents
the amplitude of Fig. 6.1 times an amplitude for a vacuum to vacuum transition. This latter part comes from the loop shown, since
it has no external legs. [f the vacuum is stable, as it is assumed to
be for all physical systems, all such vacuum to vacuum amplitudes
must add up to an overall phase factor. Since such diagrams can
be added to any non-trivial diagram, they provide the same overall
phase factor to all diagrams. Therefore, we will happily ignore all
vacuum to vacuum processes.
--I
BB takes pluce.
6.2
Normalized states
So far, we have shown how only a few terms in the Wick expansion
contribute to the S-matrix elements for specified initial and final
states. We have not calculated any matrix clement explicitly.
To perform such a calculation, we face a small problem. We have
defined the states in the Fock space by acting on the vacuum by
the creation operator, as for example in Eg. (3.39). However, this
95
definition is not the best for calculations, for two reasons. First,
the creation operators have a mass dimension of -3/2, as can be
checked from the Fourier decomposition of Eq. (3.18) for the scalar
fields, and of Eq. (4.96) for the spinor fields. Thus with the definition
of Eq. (3.39), the one-particle states have different dimensions from
the vacuum state. Continuing on this argument} the dimension of
the two-particle states will be more different, and so on for other
many particle states. The other problem is that the norm of any
one-particle state diverges, as seen from Eq. (3.40) if we put p = p'.
To avoid these problems} we can define the states within a finite
region of volume V. Physically, this does not create any problem
provided the volume V is large enough so that the boundaries of
this region are far removed. from the region of interaction. We can
calculate quantities of physical interest using such states, and then
take the limit V ~ 00 at the end of the calculations. With this
in mind, we continue to use the Fourier expansions of fields in the
infinite volume limit.
The vacuum state is assumed to be dimensionless by virtue of the
(6.12)
for the scalar field whose quanta are denoted by B. Note that the ket
is now dimensionless. Similarly, for the electrons and the positrons,
we define the one-particle states with momentum p and spin s as
Ie- (p,s)
- jt27r)3
le+(p, s
f,(p) 10) ,
(6.13)
(B(p) IB(p'
(2~)3 03(p _
p'),
(2~)3 o",o3(p -
(e+(p,slle+(p',s')
(2~)
p'),
o,,'03(p_p')
(6.14)
96
intervals. This is not a problem specifically with qnantum field theory, but with plane waves in any theory. We need to carefully eliminate such infinities from all physical quantities.
The way to solve this problem is to restrict the plane waves to a
box and then to let the box become infinite in size. Then,
(6.16)
where the integration is done over the volume V as indicated by
the subscript after the integration sign. Before taking the limit of V
going to infini ty, we obtain
I
o (O)p =
(271")3 .
(6.17)
With this definition, we see that the one-particle states of Eqs. (6.12)
and (6.13) are normalized to unity, provided we take the limit of
V --> 00 at the end of the calculation of any physical quantity.
Now we can write down the action of various field operators on
different one-particle states:
<p+(x) IB(k))
(6.18)
97
where Wk and E p represent the energies of the scalar and the electron
for the 3-momenta in the subscripts.
Similarly, for the adjoint operators
(B(k)1 4>-(x) =
1 eib (01
2w
J kV
'
1
_ ( ) ip-x (01
J2EpVus p e
,
J2Ep'Vvs' p e
(6.19)
Exercise 6.3 Proue the results oj Eq. (6.18), using the Fourier
decomposition of the .fl.elds and the commutation (or nnticommutation) relations obe'Yed by the crea.tion a.nd annihila.tion opel"o.t01'8.
6.3
sj:)
= (-ih)us(p)vs'(p')
d1
i(p+p'-k)-x
xe
1
1
1
(6.21)
J 2w k V J2EpV J2E p'V'
assuming that the spin of the final electron is s and that of the
positron is s'! and also using the fact that the vacuum ~tate is normalized to unity.
Consider now the integration over x. In the infinite volume limit
we can write
l
(6.22)
98
(6.23)
The a-function thus obtained merely gives us the constraint from 4momentum conservation. In other words it tells us that the initial
4-momentum must be equal to the final 4-momentum.
To get a feeling for a more non-trivial case, let us now move
on to the diagram given in Fig. 6.2a. The term in the Wick expansion that corresponds to this diagram was written down in Eq.
(6.10). The contractions given in that formula are nothing but the
vacuum expectation values of the time-ordered products of the operators involved, and therefore they should be replaced by i times the
propagator of the particle involved. In other words, we should make
the replacements
l
(6.24)
etc, where the propagators have been defined for the scalar fields in
3.7 and for spinor fields in 4.7. The contribution of the S-matrix
element coming from this diagram can be written as
SJ':") = (_ih)3
X
J J J
d'xI
ill.F(X2 - X3)
d' x 2
d' x 3
iSF~a(X2
xIliSFa~(xI
- X3)
99
use the matrix elements derived in Eqs. (6.19) and (6.18) to write
(6.26)
As in the case with S(I), we can perform the integrations on the
space-time points. For example, the integral over all the factors
which depend on Xl gives
Similarly, integration over X2 gives (211")44 (ql + q2 - p), and integra.tion over X3 gives (211")4 04(ql + q3 + p').
If the arguments of all these -functions vanish, it automatically
implies k = p + rI, which is the condition for overall momentum
conservation. Thus we can rewrite the product of the d-functions as
4(k - q2
P - p'),
(6.28)
Sf'
= (-,h)
J J J
a'ql
(211")4
a'q2
(211")4
(211")124(k - q2
4
d q3
(211")4
+ q3)4(ql + q2 -
p)4(k - P - p')
x i~F(qIl [u,(p)iSF(q2)iSF(q3)V,,(p')]
(6.29)
100
S~~a)
J(::~4
1] .
[J2w1V J:2E1V J2EI"V
(6.30)
Let us now concentrate on the fermion contractions. We can exchange the order of the fermion fields in one of the contractions to
get
= -iSFlio(:r2 - XI) iSFo{i(X, - X2)
=
This shows that if the diagram has a fermion line which closes on
itself, the corresponding momentum-space amplitude should have a
minus sign for the loop 'and a trace over the Dirac indices running in
the loop.
101
6.4
(6.33)
governed by the Yukawa interaction that we have been discussing.
This process will have no contribution at the first order in the
S-matrix expansion, but will have contributions at the second order.
To find the amplitude of these second order contributions, let us start
by writing the relevant term of the S-matrix, which is:
S (2) = (-ih)2
2!
J J
d4 Xl
d4 X2:!7
[: ('l/nl)),.
]
: :('ljJ'ljJ)X2:
. (6.34)
(6.35)
where Q , {3 are spinor indices as usual. We have only electrons in the
initial and the final states. Therefore, if we decompose 'ljJ into 'ljJ+
and 'ljJ_, as in Eq. (6.5), the part which will contribute to tbe present
process IS
(6.36)
102
where now we have put the field operators in the normal order and
omitted the normal ordering symbol, picking up a minus sign in the
process. Putting this back in Eq. (6.34), we see that the S-matrix
element between the initial and the final state is given by
(2)
(-ih)2
Sf; = 2!
. -.
j d'Xl j d' ,t>.F(Xl
X2
X2)
Exercise 6.5 Argue tha.t odd order tenns in the S-ma.triz ezp<1.nsion cannot contribute to the process of Eq. (6.33).
Consider now the initial state. Using Eq. (6.13), we can write it
as
Therefore,
(6.40)
103
!(k)!(k')!'(P2)!'(pJlI0)
3
Putting this bad< in Eq. (6.39) and performing the integrations over
k and k', we obtain
where EI = Jp~
+ m 2 etc.
J2EJV J2E2V
(01 [u"(p~)u/l(p;)eiP""eiP'.Z'
_u"(p;)u/l(p~)e''''Zle'P;.Z'] . (6.45)
Going back to Eq. (6.37)' we now rewrite the S-matrix element in
the form
S(2)
/'
= _ (-ih)2
2!
(q)eiq.(zl-z'l
x [u" (pJlu/l (P2)e- iPI " e-ip,z, - u" (p2)u/l (pJle- i".,.ZI e- ipI z, ]
x
[~ ~ ~ ~]
(6.46)
104
It seems that there are four different terms coming from multiplying the spinor factors. But since Xl and X2 are integrated over,
we can interchange their labels and rewrite the expression as
S};l
= (_ih)2
J Ja'x~ J(~:~4
a'XI
iLlp(q)e,q(Xl-X,)
[~ J2~2V ~ ~].
(6.47)
(-ih)2(21r)4<1 4(PI
X
+ P2 - P~
[U"(P2)jjil(p~)iLlF(PI
- P2)
- P2) -
U"(p~)jjil(P2)iLlF(PI
p~)]
x[~~~~].
(6.48)
e- (pJl
Xl
! B(PI
c(P2)
X2
(a)
e- (p,)
e- (pJl
! B(PI
- p,)
e- (PI)
Xl
e- (P2)
X2
e-(pi)
- pi)
e- (1"2)
(b)
105
S-matrix element 1 because the initial and the final states now have
two identical particles. These two terms correspond to the Feynman
diagrams of Fig. 6.4.
The second point is that the second term in Eq. (6.48) can be
obtained by interchanging p\ and P2 in the first term. But this term
comes with the opposite sign. This is expected since if two identical fermions are interchanged, the quantum mechanical amplitude
changes sign.
6.5
Feynman amplitude
Sfi = &fi
.
44'"
+ '(271")
& (L;-Pi
'"
-7
II J2EY
1
IIf .j2E1 VJI(f i ,
Pf ) i
(6.49)
which serves as a definition of the Feynman amplitude. Again. Pi and
Pi are the 4-momenta of initial and final particles, not components
of some p.
Notice the first term on the right hand side of Eq. (6.49). This
term was not present in our calculations earlier. But that is because
we did not do the calculations for a case where the initial and the
final state was the same. and so this term was zero for the cases
we considered. But it is easy to see that this term has to be there.
Consider a world where there are no interactions. In this world,
the Feynman amplitude would be zero. But there should still be 5matrix elements. Since there are no interactions, the only non-zero
S-matrix elements would be those corresponding to the same states
initially and finally. This is the &fi-term of Eq. (6.49). Interesting
106
iAlX l
= (-ih)u,(p)V,.(p'),
(6.50)
Ii
(_ih)3
X
d4
(2".~4
it>F(q)
6.6
Feynman rules
the amplitudes.
107
Internal lines
Looking at the examples of the Feynman amplitudes above, it is clear
how the internal lines contribute to the amplitude. If we have an in
terna! scalar line of momentum p, there will be a factor of itJ.F(P)
in the Feynman amplitude. Similarly, if we have an internal fermion
line, the appropriate factor is iSF(p). These statements are pictorially summarized as below:
P
............... = itJ.F(P),
P
. , -..._ _
, = iSP(p).
(6.53)
External lines
For the external lines, we can use the results in Eqs. (6.18) and
(6.19). In these equations, the exponential factors on the right hand
side go into constituting the momentum conserving b-function. The
factors under the square root are state factors which are outside the
Feynman amplitude. The rest or'the factors on the right hand side,
excluding the vacuum state, go into the Feynman rule for the external
particles. For scalar particles, nothing else remains after we throw
out all the factors mentioned above. So we need not put anything in
the Feynman rule for external scalar particles. For spin-1 particles,
we have the following factors depending on whether it is in the initial
state or in the final state:
, e-(p,s)
u,(p) ,
e-(p,",)
(6.54)
= u.,(p) .
Here, a small filled circle put at one end of any line implies the rest of
the Feynman diagram, including all other internal and external lines.
Thus the upper line shows that a particle is leaving the diagram, i.e.,
it is produced in the final state. In the lower diagram, the particle is
annihilated.
108
e+(-p,s)
= v.(p),
(6.55)
e+( -p, s)
= v.(p).
In interpreting these rules, remember the arrow convention for antiparticles. The upper diagram now represents an antiparticle in the
initial state, whereas the lower one represents an antiparticle in the
final state.
Numerical factors
We have already seen that the integration over the c<>-ordinate of
each vertex gives a factor of (2,,)4 times the momentum-conserving
6-function. If the number of vertices in a diagram be v, we will thus
obtain a factor of (2,,)4v, and v different 6-functions.
But there are other ways in which factors of 2" would come in the
amplitude. When we express the co-ordinate space propagators in
terms of their Fourier transforms, it involves an integration over the
momentum space, i.e., a factor of J d4q/(2,,)4. Thus, if there are n
internal lines in a diagram, we will obtain a factor of (2,,) -4n. So, the
overall power of 2" is 4(v-n). While defining the Feynman amplitude
from the S-matrix element, we keep a factor of (2,,)4 64 (L;p,- L;Pf)
outside. This takes care of four powers of 2". All the other powers
are left in the Feynman amplitude, which therefore has a factor of
(2,,)4(v-n-I). However, it can be shown that
v - n - 1 = -f
(6.56)
an~
connected dia-
Momentum integrations
Let us now count the number of momentum integrations. We have
one momentum for each propagator from the Fourier transform, and
there are n of them. But as we said before, we obtain v different 6functions from the co-ordinate integrations at the v different vertices.
109
d4q
(211")4
(6.57)
that the rules for fermions should come with appropriate Dirac indices. In case of any confusion, it is always safe to work with these
indices. However,our earlier experience shows that if we follow a
fermion line in the direction opposite to the arrow and put the Feynman rules for the elements encountered this way, the Dirac indices
appear exactly in order, and we can do away with all the Dirac indices and treat the entire expression as a matrix formula. For fermion
lines which do not close on themselves, such formulas will start with
a 11: or a til and end with a u or v spinor. In between, there can be
matrices corresponding to propagators and vertices.
For fermion loops, we can start from anywhere and follow the line
in the direction opposite to the arrow. If we keep the Dirac indices,
110
at the end of the loop we will come back to the same index that we
started with. Summing over all the Dirac indices will then imply a
trace over the string of factors obtained around the loop.
Antisymmetry of fermions
The fermions anticommute among themselves. This fact manifests
itself in various ways. For each fermion loop, we need to put a factor
of -1, as explained at the end of 6.3.
The other consequence of this antisymmetry is a relative minus
sign between diagrams differing from one another by an exchange
of two identical external fermion lines. This was discussed with an
example in 6.4.
Vertices
The Feynman rules for the vertices cannot be specified in such general terms, since they depend on the interaction Lagrangian which
gives rise to them. Roughly speaking, if we take the term in the
interaction Lagrangian, take out all the field operators, and multiply
the remaining expression by a factor of i, we obtain the Feynman
rule for the vertex. If there arc n identical operators being taken
out, we should multiply the result by a factor of nL For example,.
for the interaction Lagrangian given in Eq. (5.9), the Feynman rule
for the vertex is -ih. We have noticed that this is the factor coming
in the S-matrix expansion for each occurrence of the vertex. On the
other hand, if we had a >..4 interaction term, the Feynman rule for
the corresponding vertex will be 4!iA. For other interactions, the
Feynman rule can be obtained similarly. We will, of course, discuss
many examples later.
6.7
Virtual particles
111
= PI - Po.
correct.
The internal boson was created at some time during the entire
process and annihilated at some other time. If the difference between
these two times is short enough, the energy uncertainty can be larger
than the debated amount. Thus, this internal particle is bound to
be short-lived, the extent of which is to be determined by the timeenergy uncertainty relation.
We have, of course, obtained 4-momentum conservation at each
vertex for any Feynman diagram, as illustrated in Ch. 6. So, for the
calculation of the Feynman diagrams, we should use 4-momentum
conservation, which will mean that the internal line need not satisfy
the energy-momentum relation q2 = M 2. This is true in general for
internal lines in any Feynman diagram.
There are various words to say this. The relation PPP~ = m 2 is
sometimes called the on-shell condition for a particle of mass m, since
it is satisfied on a sphere if we could draw the 4-dimensional graph
corresponding to the components of the momentum vector. Particles
on external lines, which satisfy this condition, are accordingly called
on-shell particles. The internal particles are called off-shell particles. Equivalently, one uses the terms physical particles and virtual
particles respectively for the same purpose. Thus, we are led to the
conclusion that internal lines in a Feynman diagram can correspond
to virtual particles.
112
This is in fact the reason that we can use propagators. Notice that
the denominators of all the propagators vanish if the corresponding
particle is on-shell. However, propagators are to be used for internal
lines only, and if the particles in those lines are virtual, it makes
the propagator meaningful. If it happens that the internal line of a
Feynman diagram corresponds to a physical particle, we will have to
discuss it on a different footing.
One example of this kind of diagrams is shown in Fig. 6.2b. If we
cut the line going from X2 to X3 in this diagram, the diagram falls
apart in two pieces. Such diagrams are called I-particle reducible (or
IPR for short) diagrams. Other examples of IPR diagrams appear
in Fig. 6.2c-<l. In all of these examples, the line being cut carries
the same momentum as an external physical particle. For this, we
cannot use the propagator directly. The technique for calculating
such diagrams will be taken up later, in Ch. 12.
Of course not all IPR diagrams have this property. For example,
the diagrams in Fig. 6.4 are also IPR, but the internal lines represent virtual particles. So we can use the propagator to calculate the
amplitude of such diagrams. In addition, we can of course discuss
diagrams which do not have any such internal line which, when cut,
can break the diagram into two pieces. Such diagrams are called
I-particle irreducible (or IPI) diagrams.
6.8
So far, we have been talking about S-matrix elements only. These are
diagrams in which all external particles are physical and observable.
In practical calculations however sometimes one has to evaluate amplitudes of diagrams where this is not the case. For example, suppose
we have to evaluate the next order correction to the scattering diagrams given in Fig. 6.4. There will be no diagrams at the third order
in the S-matrix expansion, but there will be a number of diagrams
at the fourth order. Some examples are shown in Fig. 6.5.
There are, of course, other diagrams at this order. But it is clear
that the calculation of the four displayed diagrams will be much
easier if we decide to do it in two steps. In the first step, one can
calculate the diagram shown in Fig. 6.6, with on-shell fermions of
1
e- (pil
e- (P2)
B(PI
e- (pil
c(p;)
e- (P2)
c(Po)
..
e- (P2)
P2)
e-(p;)
(bl)
B(PI -
B(PI .
I
(al)
e- (pil
..- ..
pJl
C(P2)
113
c(p;)
C (PI)
B(p!
p;)
e-(p,)
e- (P2)
. .
e-(P2)
P2)
e- (pJl
(b2)
(a2)
(6.58)
where V(p,p') stands for the effective vertex. Using the Feynman
e-(p)
p-k:p'-k
-=---..--,
,
. -
~.~:
=---..-~:
,,
,,
Figure 6.6:
'.
.
.. .
e-(p')
. ...
114
rules described in 6.6, we can write the expression for this effective
vertex as follows:
-iV(p,p') = (_ih)3
d4k
(271")4 iSp(p' - k) iSp(p - k) i~F(k) , (6.59)
where the factor (-ih)3 comes from the three vertices of this diagram.
Once this is evaluated, we can write the amplitudes of the four
diagrams appearing in Fig. 6.5 in the following way:
i.-H'a' = [u(p',){ -iV (PI, p; )}u(pilJ i~F(P' - p;) [u(p;){ -ih }U(p2)]
i.-H'a2 = [u(p',){-ih}u(pilJ i~p(p, - p',) [u(p;){-iV(p"p;)}U(p2)]
i.-H'b' = [u(p;){ -iV(p"p;)}u(pilJ i~F(P' - p;) [u(p;){ -ih}u(P2l]
i.-H'b2 = [u(p;){ -ih}u(pilJ i~F(P' - p;) [u(p'tl{ -iV(P2,p;)}u(P2)],
(6.60)
e-
+ e+
Chapter 7
initial and the final state are different, in which case the scattering is
called inelastic. In either case, the important physical quantity is the
scattering cross section. In this c,hapter we define these quantities,
along with some examples of calculations.
I
7.1
Decay rate
44
'"
(7.1 )
where E, is the energy of the initial particle and Ef's are the energies
of various particles in the final state. The transition probability from
the initial to the final state is then given by ISf,12.
115
116
{7.2}
under an integration sign. If the function f(p} happens to be another
6-function, we will write
{7.3}
It is now necessary to assign a meaning to 6' (O}p. This can be done
if we perform our calculations within a large volume V and a large
time T. Repeating the argument which led to Eq. (6.17), we can now
say
,
VT
6 {O}p = (211")' .
{7.4}
Using this, we can now square the S-matrix element given in Eq.
{7.1} and obtain
15 1,1 2 =
1
{211"}"
6 (pi'- "
L.,PI}VT 2EV
2E1 V
I
'I
I
I.4Iil 2 ,
{7.5}
ISId 2 IT =
l n 2E V
(211")"
6 {pi'-"
L.,PI}2E
1'1
I
I.4Id 2 .
{7.6}
117
and putting one state into each cell. Therefore the number of singleparticle states in a momentum-space volume of d 3 p is given by
Vd 3 p
(21T)3
(7.7)
r=
I
2.
JII
PI
. (2 d)32E
(21T) 4 64 (Pi I
1T
I
'L..,
"
2
PI) 1Af'/d
(7.8)
7.2
7.2.1
r=
I
2M
dp
(21T)32E
d p'
4 4
,
2
(21T)32E' (21T) 6 (k - P - p) 1Af'lil . (7.9)
In the factor outside the integral sign, we have replaced the energy
Ei by the mass M of the decaying scalar since we are considering the
decay in the rest frame of the scalar particle.
To the lowest order in the coupling constant h, the Feynman
amplitude was given in Eq. (6.50). Putting that result in, we obtain
h
r = 2M
d p
d p'
(21T)32E
(21T)32E'
2
(21T)46 4(k - p - p') lu,(p)v,,(p') 1
(7.10)
118
This in fact will be the decay rate if we look for specific spin values
s for the electron and s' for the positron. However, let us say we do
not really care for the spin projections of the final particles. In that
case, we should really sum over all the possible spins. Since final
states with different spin projection values are incoherent, we should
add the probabilities rather than the amplitudes. This gives
d3p
(2rr)32E
3
d p'
(2rr)32E'
L lu,(p)v,,(p')
2
1 .
(7.11)
s,s'
Esp," =
=
L
L
lu,(p)v,,(p')1
[u,(p)v,,(p')] [u,(p)v,,(p')]' .
(7.12)
S,s'
Since the quantities within square brackets are numbers, we can replace the complex conjugation operation by hermitian conjugation.
Thus,
[u,(p)v,,(p')]' = [u,(p)v,,(p')J t
[u!(Ph'ov,,(p')r
(7.13)
(7.14)
'Where
(7.15)
119
Let us now go back to Eq. (7.12) and rewrite it using Eq. (7.13)
and putting the spinor indices explicitly:
E,p;n
= L [(u'(Pn (v"
(pl))n] [CV,,(p'fJ(U,(piJ]
~,.!'
[L
u,(p)u, (P)]
po.
[L
v,, (p')V"(pi)]
s'
(7.16)
n{3
Notice that we have now separated the sums over s and S', and these
sums over single spin variables were given in Eq. (4.53). Using the
results, we can now write
E,p'n =
m]nfJ
= Tr [(p+ m) (pi -
m)l
(7.17)
o Exercise 7.2 FOT the more gene1'o.l case wh.en the matrix element
is oj the jonn u,(p)Fv,,(p') UJith any 4 x 4 matrix F, show thoI the
s'Pin sum oj the absolute squaTe oj the matrix element can be 'Written
as
(7.18)
1,1'
Traces of 1'-matrices
- mp + mp' - m2 ).
(7.19)
Here, m is a number which can be taken outside of the trace operation. The last term is then really m 2 times the trace of the unit
matrix, which gives 4m 2 The second term can be written as
(7.20)
since the trace of any l'-matrix vanishes, as was proved in Eq. (4.10).
For the same reason, the third term also vanishes. In fact, one can
prove a more general result, viz., that the trace of any odd number
of l'-matrices vanishes. This and some other useful trace formulas
are given in Appendix A.2.
120
We are now left with the first trace appearing in Eq. (7.19). This
can be rewritten as
pl'p'VTr h~'Yv).
(721)
(7.22)
or equivalently, as
(7.23)
using the anticommutation relation of the ,-matrices in the last step.
Now I gJ.w is just a number so far as the spinorial indices are concerned,
so the trace is really g~v times the trace of the unit matrix. Thus
Eq. (7.23) gives us 4p p'. Putting it in Eq. (7.19), we obtain
(7.24)
Inserting the expression for the spin sum in Eq. (7.11), we can write
h2
f=2M
(7.25)
First we evaluate the final factor, which came from the spin sum,
subject to the constraints of the momentum-conserving IS-function.
The a-function enforces k = p + p', and squaring both sides, we get
2p . p' = M2 - 2m 2 . Therefore,
4(p. p' - m 2 ) = 2(M 2
4m 2 )
(7.26)
Phase space
Thus the factor coming from the Feynman amplitude becomes independent of the magnitude or direction of the 3-momcnta, and can be
pulled out of the integral in Eq. (7.25). So we can write
h 2 (M 2 _ 4m 2 )
f=
M
p,
(7.27)
121
where
(7.28)
This p is usually called the phase space factor. It contains all kine-matical factors, Le., factors not involving the Feynman amplitude
and the initial state factor. It also includes the a-function for the
4-momentum conservation. Of course, it is not always possible to
make such a separation into a phase space factor and the Feynman
amplitude factor. It works here and in other problems where the
factors other than p do not depend on the magnitude or direction of
the 3-momenta. Later, we will also encounter examples where this
separation cannot be done. However in this case, the separation
works , and it is very convenient to do things piecewise. Let us now
evaluate the phase space factor.
Starting from Eq. (7.28), we can immediately integrate over one
of the final momenta, say p'. This gives
I
P = (211")'
d p
,
4EE' a(ke - Po - Po)'
(7.29)
= (M,O,O,O).
(7.30)
1
P = (211")'
=
.!.
11"
d p
(7.31)
In the last step, we have integrated over the angular variables of the
3-vector p, noting the fact that the integrand does not depend on
them. This angular integration gives a factor 411".
122
dpp=dEE.
(7.32)
p=
28~
JE
dE p . J(E -
~M)
2
1~
=8~VI-M'i.
(7.33)
= Mh
8~
(1 _
4m
M2
)%
(7.34)
Exercise 7.3 * Ca.lculate the deco.ll Tate for the process B --+ e-e+
in Q frame where the initial B po.rticle moues with a. _speed v"in
the z-diTeCtion, i.e., its 4-momentuffi is given blJ kP = ')'M(l,O,O,v)
where "f = (1 - V2 )-1/2. You mall neglect the mass of the e1ect,.o11.
faT this calculation.. Is yOUT final result justifia.ble by a. time-dilation
argument?
7.2.2
v~
Ve
123
is the electron-neutrino and
The lowest order Feynman amplitude for the process is then given
by
.,Itj' =
~ U(e) (p')-y'(1 -
Let us find the decay rate of \.mpolarized muons. For this we sum
over initial muon spin and divide by 2. Summing over the final spins,
we get the decay rate of the muon,
f=_1_
2m"
3
3
d3p'
d k
d k'
(21T)32Po
(21T)32ko
(21T)32ko
X(21T)46 4(p - p' - k - k') x ~
l.,Itj,I 2
(7.39)
spm
Here m" is the mass of the muon, which appears in the denominator
since we are calculating the decay rate in the rest frame of the muon.
Since the subscript J1. here stands for the muon, we will not use the
same subscript for Lorentz indices in this section, in order to avoid
any possible confusion.
124
Spin sum
~2 L.
l.A'd = G}
4spin
.
Spin
[U(e)(p'h.l(1 - I's)v(v,)(k')]
I's)U(~)(p)]
[U(v")(kh.l(l -
[U(v")(khp(l-
I's)U(~)(p)]'.
(7.40)
We shall take the neutrinos to be massl~, because current experimental data shows that even if the neutrinos are massive, they are
much lighter than all charged particles. Then the spin sum rules
described in 7.2.1 yield
-f
G2
2
1.A'1 =
Tr
X
[(p' + meh.l(1 -
I's)fI'P(1 - I's)
Tr [h.l(l - "Is)(p
+ m"hp(l- "Is)] .
(7.41)
From now on, we will write 1.A'1 2 for the absolute square of the
Feynman amplitude, suitably summed or averaged over various spins
as the problem demands. Now, "Is anticommutes with any of the ,.I,
and so it commutes with a string of an even number of ')'-matrices.,
Using this, we can write
2f"lP(I-"Is),
(7.42)
using the property ("(s)2 = I in the last step. Then we can write
1.A'1 2 = G~, Tr [(p' + meh.lf"l"(l - "Is)]
X
(7.43)
[p.lkp
+ p'Pk'.1 -
+ Ppk.l -
(7.44)
125
Notice that in each trace factor, the first three terms are symmetric
in the Lorentz indices >., P, whereas the last term is antisymmetric.
Thus, the contraction of the first three terms with the last one of the
other trace vanishes, and we are left with
1.1 2
= 16G} [(P"k'P
+ p'Pk"
]
-""pT" >'YPfI P1Dk'Tk vp,
(745)
.
The result of the contraction among the symmetric parts of the two
traces is given by
2 (p . p' k . k'
+ P . k'
k . p') .
(7.46)
As for the other parts involving the e--tensors, we use the identity of
Eq. (A.33),
>'UpT
>'1.'1"1_
- -
(7.47)
(7.48)
Combining the two terms and noting the negative sign between the
two in Eq. (7.45), we obtain the final result for the square of the
Feynman amplitude in the following form:
1.1 2 = ~ L 1./d 2 =
2 spm
.
(7.49)
J J J
The integration is substantially more complicated than in the example shown in 7.2.1 because the final state here has three particles.
So, we perform the integration in steps. First, wc write Eq. (7.50) as
r=
G2
sF
11"
mp
J 2~
d3
Po
p'p'PI,p(p-p'),
(7.51)
126
l>.p(q) =
J
J
d3k
2k
o
d k'
(7.52)
Note that the integration measures over the! final state momenta can
be written as
(7.53)
where m is the mass of the relevant particle. The form on the right
hand side makes it obvious that the integration measure is a Lorentz
invariant quantity. Thus. the entire thing under the integration sign
in Eq. (7.51) is Lorentz invariant.
Therefore !>.p must be a rank-2 tensor, and can depend only on
the 4-vector q. So the most general form for !>..p can be written as
(7.54)
where A and B are Lorentz invariants which need to be determined.
From dimensional analysis, we see that both A and B have to be
dimensionless.
We have now two different expressions for l)"p, which are given
in Eqs. (7.52) and (7.54). Contracting hoth these expressions by g>'P
and equating the results, we obtain
(4A+B)q2=
J
J
3
d k' 4
- J (q-k-k')k'k.
d3k
2ko
2k~
(7.55)
+ il),!,
(A
=
=
'l"k
d 3'"
';'4
J J
J~:: J~:~'
2"0
2k'o
J ('I - k - k " ) q k q. k
127
(k . k') eM
= kok~ -
k . k'
= kok~ + k 2 = 2k5 .
(7.57)
Inserting this into Eq. (7.55) and performing the k' integration, we
obtain
(7.58)
The angular integrations give a factor of 47T, and the integration over
the magnitude of k is easily performed by using the a-function. This
gives "q5/4 for the right hand side. This result is obtained in the
CM frame where q = 0, i.e., q2 = q5. So
4A+ B
= "4'
(7.59)
f= 24
C 2F
4
7l"
JP
J
3
mlJ
C 2F
4
24" m
d , ~ Ip 2
-2
' PP
gA" + 2QAQp)
Po
3
P,
2
I
,
d
- , (Q p'p +2T}'Qp .q)
2po
"
(q
(762)
128
(7.63)
In this frame, let us write the electron momentum as
(7.64)
This means
(7.65)
in this frame. Moreover,
q2
= (p -
p ')2
2 miJ. E e
= rnlJ.2 + me2 -
P .q = p .q - q
rnlJ. E e
(7.66)
(7.67)
2
- me .
(7.68)
_ G}
r-
d p'
24".4
2E,
[(m~ + m; - 2m E,) E,
p
(7.69)
1~:3
dE, p' [( m~ +
m; - 2m pE,) E,
(7.70)
r=
dr
dE'dE,'
(7.71 )
129
where
[ (m~ + m; - 2rn
JJ
Ee) E e
mn ].
(7.72)
This quantity then represents the transition rate per unit energy
into final states with electron energy between Ee and Ee + dEe. In
other words, jf we observe electrons coming out of the decay of a
large number of muons, the probability that the electron energy is
between E, and E, + dE, is given by
1 dr
dE, dE,.
(7.73)
(7.74)
130
the entire energy. The upper limit is obtained when the two neutrinos
are emitted in the same direction, opposite to the direction of the
electron. In this case, p' = k + k', which also means E e = k o + k o
since all the decay products are now considered. massless. However
E e + ko + k o = m~ due to energy conservation. So we obtain that
in this case, the energy of the electron is m~/2, which should be the
upper limit of integration. Therefore, the total decay rate is given
by
1
r=
G2 m
F
12;or
0
2
5
GFm ~
192;or3 .
(7.75)
Exercise 7.5 Start from the expression faT the differential deco.'Y
T'nte in Eq. (1.72). Do not completely neglect the electron ma.ss.
Find the corrections to the total decay Tate at the lowcst order oj
me/rnw Using me = 0.511 MeV and rnlJ = 106 MeV. estimate the
fractional error in assuming me = O.
(7.76)
7.3
131
from this target sphere is given by rra 2 I A. Calling this the probability of a scattering event and denoting it by Ps, we can then write
rra 2 = PsA.
(7.77)
This equation gives the cross sectional area of the sphere in terms of
the beam area.
All objects are of course not hard spheres. But in a scattering
process, we can still define the effective crotis section by the same
formula. The cross section is usually denoted by the symbol Cf. Thus,
by definition,
a = PsA.
(7.78)
(7.79)
or,
I
A=-.
pvt
(7.80)
Pslt
a=--.
pv
(7.81)
132
(7.82)
The 6,.-term stands for the case when nothing happened, and is of
no interest to us. Throwing it out and squaring the matrix element,
we obtain
ISf;1
= (27[)'6' (
VT,
f,1
T
2
,
1 II 1
L.:P'-7Pf VII, 2EY
f 2EfV I~fd 2 ,
,(",
= (27[) 6
",)
(7.84)
This is the transition rate to a final state of specified momentum.
For a range of momenta, we should integrate this, including a factor
of V d3p/(27[)3 for the number of states. This gives
u =
P:V4E:E,J(g (2:~i;Ef)
(27[)'6'(
~P' - 2(Pf)l~f'12,
(7.85)
7.4.
133
mIm~
E12
(7.86)
'
where Pi and E i denote, for i = 1,2, the 3-momenta and the energies
of the initial particles whose masses are ml and m2. In a collinear
frame, i.e., if PI and P2 are along the same line, this reduces to
Vrel
1~: -
~ I
(7.87)
This coincides with relative velocity for small velocities, but not in
general. Then we can write the definition of the scattering cross
section as
<7=
Vr e4E
E
l12
Jn
f
d pf
(211")32E (211") ~
4 4 (",
",)
LPi - LPf
if
lAi'fil .
(7.88)
7.4
A scattering process has two particles in the initial state. But there
can be any number of particles in the final state. However, the calculations of cross sections become particularly simple if the final state
also contains two particles. In this ease, it is also easier to analyze
experimental data. Such processes are called 2- to-2 scattering processes. In this section, we show some generalities of the calculation
of scattering cross-section in such cases.
Let us symbolically denote the scattering process in the following
way:
(7.89)
where PI and P2 are the 4-momenta for the initial particles 1 and 2,
and m2. For the final particles l' and 2', we
which have masses
denote the momenta and masses with a prime.
m,
134
1
(1
V<el
1
4E, E,
d p'
d p'
(211" )3~El
(211" )3;E,
(211")48 4(Pl + p, - p; - p;)
I.AI' .
(7.90)
p;=(E"p')
e
p, = (E"p) - _ . - -
p; =
Figure 7.1:
--'~--p, =
(E" -p)
(E" -p')
frame.
has stuck from the days when all experiments were done by directing
a beam of particles onto a fixed target. Maybe a name like the "fixed
target frame" would have been more appropriate for what we want
to say, but we will stick to the conventionaL
7.4.1
135
eM frame
Pi = - P2,
(7.91)
PI = - P2
(7.92)
since
= 641I"
2E1 E
1
2 Vrel
p;
d E' o(E I
E'
1
2
+ E2 - E'1 - E'}-I-1
2 ..# .
7.93 )
(7.95)
VS = E I + E 2
(7.96)
136
6(VS-E~-JE~2-m~2+m22).
(7.97)
The argument of this d-function is a function of the integration variable E;, and so we must use Eq. (3.15) to reduce it. The argument
vanishes when
s+m /2 _m/2
E', --
1
2.,fS
== WI,
(7.98)
= w.
(7.99)
(7.100)
drY
1
d n~, = 6 471" .E1E 2 .,fSSVreJ
J"'"
dLI
P d(E l
wd -1-.
oLl
--
P
6411" E, E .,fSv,el
loLl .
(7.101)
([s -
(m,
+ m')~ls
- (m, -m,).]) y,
(7.102)
V,e' =
P,
U, + ~J '
(7.103)
137
= P2'
(7.105)
The solution to P is an expression similar to Eq. (7.102), with the
masses of initial particles instead of the final ones.
Putting all the factors together, we can rewrite Eq. (7.101) in the
final form:
do
dfl
-=c-;I.64rr 2 s
(7.106)
We emphasize again that in this expression, the Feynman amplitude
factor has to be evaluated with 4-momentUITl conservation. For elastic scattering, this formula simplifies to
du
dfl
1
..A'2
64,..2 s I I
(7.107)
7.4.2
Lab frame
We now turn to the other frame of interest, in which one of the initial
particles is at rest. Without loss of generality, we can take this to
be the first particle in the general notation for the scattering process
138
P; = (E;, V;)
82
P2
(E2,V2) ------.-81
Figure 7.2: Kinematics of two particle scattering in the Lab frame. Particle
1 is at rest in this frame, shown as a blob.
given in Eq. (7.89). The general picture of the scattering process will
then look like Fig. 7.2.
The most general formulas in this frame look quite cumbersome,
so we are presenting the formulas for the case in which one of the
particles in the initial as well as in the final state is massless. Since
we have chosen the initial state as the rest frame for the particle 1,
this particle cannot be massless. We will take m2 = 0. This also
means that Vrel = 1, since one of these initial particles is massless
and the other is at rest. In the final state, without further loss of
generality, we can put m~ = o.
We can still start from Eq. (7.93), except that with our assumption of m2 = 0, it is more convenient to integrate over p~ first and
leave the integration over V; for the future. The only change in Eq.
without any other change at
(7.93) would be to replace d 3 by d3
this stage. In this frame, the components of the momenta of different
particles can be chosen as follows:
p;
p;,
PI = (mhO,O,O),
P2 = (E2, 0, 0, E 2 ),
pIt = (Ei
sin 81 , 0, P/l
I
-p;
COS
OJ) ,
P; = (E;,E~sin82,0,E~cos82).
(7.108)
139
the x-z plane. This implies that the other scattered particle must
also be in the x-z plane, since no other particle has any momentum
component in the y-direction and hence momentum conservation in
this direction forces this component to be zero.
Applying momentum conservation conditions on the x and z components, we obtain the relations
pit
sinDt - E;sinB2 = O!
p; cos 01 + E2cos O2 =
E2
(7.109)
E;.
(7.110)
This means
(7.111)
Writing
(7.112)
in analogy with Eq. (7.94), we can now express the differential cross
section in the following form:
M
dO 2
+ E2 -
E; - E 2) 1-'*'1
(7.113)
+ E2 -
E 2)2 = E?
+ E 22 -
Le.) when
(7.115)
Thus,
<I(m!
+ E 2 - E; - E 2) =
<I(E2-
W2)
I1 +
dE'IdE~
2 E;=lol2
(7.116)
140
dE'
1+_'
dE;
I
E;=W2
= 1
E2 - E,coso'l
E'
1 +
I
E~=W2
m, + E, - E,cosO,
w,
(7.117)
mj + 2m,E, - m',z
(m,
+ Ez -
E, cos O,)Z
1.4fl z.
(7.118)
.(7.119)
dfl
Use this directly to obtain the decay
7.5
l'{tte.
141
(7.120)
where, as usual, p, k etc. are the momenta of various particles. The
interaction Lagrangian describing the process is
~nl
-"
=G
J2 F
"'(vo)"I (I -
(7.121)
.4li
=~
U(vol(k'J-y"(1- "Is)U(,)(p)
il(~)(p'J-y,,(1
- "Is)u(vv)(k).
(7.122)
We will square this amplitude, with a sum over final spins and
an average over initial spins. For the averaging 1 one peculiarity of
neutrinos has to be noted. Although they are spin-~ particles, they
appear to come only in one helicity state, with helicity -1. Thus,
averaging over initial spins will involve a division by 2 because of
the electron spin only. There will be no corresponding factor from
neutrino spin states. So, in the general formulas for cross sections
derived in 7.4, we should put
G:
Tr
[(p + m,J-yP(1 -
x Tr [hp(1 - "Is)(p'
"Isl'''I'(1 - "15) 1
+ m~h,(1
- "15)), (7.123)
(7.124)
7.5.1
Chapter 7.
142
Cross-section in CM frame
In the CM frame where p = -k, we can use Eq. (7.106) for the
differential cross-section to obtain
do
- -dO
(s-m;)--2
14(1
., .
1
64;or2 s
S -
(7.125)
m~
s - m2
= "-:2:;-..jSrs",e .
(7.126)
Therefore,
E --
Jp
2 _
+ me
s +m e
(7.127)
2..jS .
Then
(7.128)
The quantity p' . k', which also appears in the expression of Eq.
(7.124), can be evaluated by starting from the momentum conservation equation p + k = pI + k'. and squaring hoth sides. This gives,
since k2 = k'2 = 0,
II
P .k
= p. k -
22
2(m" - me)
1
= 2(8
-
Tn").
(7.129)
Putting these back into Eq. (7.124) and u,ing Eq. (7.125), we obtain
do
C} (s -
- - dO - 4;or2
m;)2
s
(7.130)
For s
m;,
C 2 (s - m 2 )2
---.E."
;or
s
(7.131)
7.5.2
143
To evaluate the same cross-section in the Lab frame, we can use the
general formulas of 7.4.2 since we have one massless particle in both
the initial and the final states. In this frame,
(7.132)
pk=mw 1
2+ 2mew - milo2)
'k' = 2"1 ( m
p'
(7.133)
Putting these in the expression for IAfl 2 appearing in Eq. (7.124) and
using the expression for the differential cross-section in Eq. (7.118),
we obtain
G}
da
dfh = 411'"2
(m; ++
me
2mew - m~)2
w - w cos 82
(7.134)
G2jl
'(m2+2m w_m 2 )2
..L
d(cosB J
'
,
"
21T'
-1
G} (m; + 2m,w -
-;-
me
+w -
w cos 82
m~)2
m; + 2mew
(7.135)
eM frame
(7.136)
vJ,-e scattering
moues with a speed v = w/(m~ + w) with rcs'Pect to the rest frame
of the electron. Calculo.te the energy oj both, particles in this frame.
Ij thell are denoted b1J Ell o.nd Wv , show thut s = (Ell + w v )2 =
+2mew.
m;
144
7.6
Mandelstam variables
= (PI + P2)2 ,
t = (PI U
pD 2 ,
= (PI - P2)2
(7.137)
145
Let us, however. try to convince ourselves that the three variables
are sufficient to describe the cross-section for 2-t0-2 scattering. There
are fouf particles, but because of 4-momentum conservation, the 4momenta of three of them are independent. From threr- momenta,
we can make six invariants, viz. we can contract each momenta with
itself, and with one another. Thus we will have six different scalar
products. However, fOUf combinations of these will give the masses
of the four particles involved. Thus, we are left with only two scalar
parameters. And we have defined three Mandelstam variables. This
shows that the Mandelstam variables are not only sufficient, in fact
there is some redundancy in their definition. In fact, it is straight
forward to verify that
(7.138)
(1.8) t"at
(7139)
irrespectiue of the interoctions.
Chapter 8
Quantization of the
electromagnetic field
We have already discussed how to quantize fields with spin-O and
spin-!. In this chapter, we describe how to quantize spin-l fields.
A familiar example of spin-I particles is the photon, which is the
quantum of the electromagnetic field. Let us now see how the photon
appears through quantization of this field. This will help us see the
connection between the classical theory and its quantized version. To
set up the notation, we will begin with a brief summary of classical
electromagnetic theory.
8.1
"'1 E = p,
"'1XB-a:=j,
(8.1)
"'1B=O,
8B
"'1xE=-8t
146
(8.2)
147
These last two equations involve six quantities, viz., the components
of the 3-vectors E and B. They can be expressed in terms of four
quantities, viz., the components of a 3-vector A and a scalar quantity
<po
B = V x A,
E = -V<p -
aA
at .
(8.3)
In fact, these four quantities transform like the components of a 4vector A, Le.,
A"
(8.4)
In terms of these quantities, one can now write Eq. (8.3) in a manifestly covariant form:
(8.5)
where the components of the field-strength tensor Fv " are the components of the electric and magnetic fields:
FI-lil
E'
-E'
0
B3
_E2
_E3 _B 2
E 2 E3
_B 3 B 2
0
-B
'
B'
0
(8.6)
Fv" is called the field strength tensor, while Av is called the potential.
The components of Fv" can be obtained by replacing EO by _EO in
Eq. (8.6). The two homogeneous Maxwell equations given in Eq.
(8.2) can now be written in the form
(8.7)
On the other hand, the inhomogeneous Maxwell equations, given in
Eq. (8.1), can be written as
(8.8)
where l' is a 4-vector which incorporates the sources, Le., the charge
density and the current density:
j"
= (j0,j) =
(p,j).
(8.9)
148
we start from
(8.10)
The Euler-Lagrange equations obtained from this Lagrangian by
varying A~ are precisely those given in Eq. (8.8). The current density
y\ which comes from external sourc.es, depends on the field operators of these source fields. For example, if the sources are electrons,
we should have j~ = -eVry~1/J. In field theoretic language, we can
say that this is an interaction term. We will discuss these terms in
Ch.9. In this chapter, we discuss only the pure electromagnetic field,
which can be described by
!t' = -
~F~vPv
(8.11)
~LV
is invariant under
(8.12)
where (} is any differentiable function of space-time. Such transformations can affect the values of A~ at each space-time point differently, and are called local tmnsformations. In contrast, for the phase
rotations of fermion fields or of complex scalar fields, which we discussed in Eqs. (3.54) and (4.91), the transformation was the same for
all space-time points. This type of transformations are called global
transformations.
Under the transformation (8.12), the Lagrangian of Eq. (8.10)
changes by
(8.13)
If the current jlJ. is a conserved current, 8/-1-YJ = 0, we find that
the Lagrangian changes by a total divergence. It follows that the
dynamics of the electromagnetic field is invariant under (8.12) even
when it is coupled to an external current, as long as the current is
conserved. This derivation assumes that jI' is independent of AJ-l
This assumption may not be true in general , as we found for scalar
electrodynamics in Ex. 2.9 (p26). Even thm the Lagrangian may be
invariant, as it was there, but the proof is a little more complicated.
8.2
149
There are many ways to see that the classical theory of electromagnetic fields, outlined above, cannot be directly quantized. One way
is to convince oneself that the propagator of such a field does not
exist. For this, let us go back to the equation of motion. Eq. (8.8).
This can be rewritten, using the definition of the field tensor from
Eq. (8.5), in the following form:
a~(~A~-a~A~)
=i'.
(8.14)
or
(g'~D - a~~) A~ =
i'
(8.15)
+ a k~k v
9~ v
(8.19)
150
= JL =
JL
M~
J(80A~)
= F~o.
(8.20)
It follows that nO = O. One of the canonical momenta does not exist. The equations defining the canonical momenta cannot therefore
be inverted to express the quantities Alt in terms of the momenta.
Accordingly, the Hamiltonian formulation does not exist.
The deeper reason for this fact can be understood by looking at
the Maxwell equations in Eq. (8.1). The field variables are the six
components of the 3-vectors Band E, a..c; mentioned earlier. However, Eq. (8.2) introduces four constraints on them, so that there
are really two independent degrees of freedom in the electromagnetic
field. We are trying to represent these by the 4-vector A~. So, all the
components of AJ.' are not independent. We have never encountered
such a situation while talking about scalar fields or Dirac fields. Indeed, a Dirac field also had four components, but all of them were
independent. ~or AIL I only two of the fOUf components are independent, and this is the root of the problem. We will have to somehow.
deal with this problem of redundancy before we can quantize the theory. Finally, although the field A~ is called the potential in classical
physics, we shall refer to it as the photon field.
o Exercise 8.1 SUPllose, instead of the photon field, 'We a.re considering the theory of a. massitJe \lector field, given bll the Proen La~
grangUln
(8.21 )
8.3
(8.22)
The photon is known to be massless to a very high degree of accuracy. So we will not try to add a mass term as in Eq. (8.21) just to
151
define the propagator. Such a mass term is also not invariant UDder the local transformation noted in Eq. (8.12). !nvariance under
this transformation means that given any electric and magnetic field,
there is some freedom in defining what the A~ should be. Therefore,
if we try to find A~(x) at any space-time point x by operating on the
sources jlJ.(x / ) by a Green's function, the Green's function needs to
be able to find all the A~(x) which are related by Eq. (8.12). Such
a Green's function cannot exist, as we have seen in the previous section. This is a classical problem , not a quantum one. A first step
towards a resolution is to look for a representative A~(x) from each
(infinite) set of A~(x) connected by Eq. (8.12). This representative
A~(x) can be chosen by imposing a condition on A~(x), and the procedure is called gauge-fixing. Examples of gauge-fixing relations are
the Lorenz gauge, a~A~ = 0, the Coulomb gauge, V . A = 0, the
axial gange, A 3 = 0, the temporal gauge, Ao = 0. Different choices
of the gauge-fixing relation (also called gauge choices) are useful in
different situations. We are interested in a Lagrangian formulation,
so we shall incorporate the gauge-fixing procedure directly into the
Lagrangian. We shall use a generalization of the Lorenz gauge, which
is the most commonly used manifestly Lorentz-covariant gauge-fixing
relation.
Let us start this procedure by rewriting the action arising from
the Lagrangian of Eq. (8.11).
J
-~ Jri'x [(a~A")(~
(a~A")(O" A~)I
J [(a~A")(a"A~)l J [a~(A"i)"A~) A"(a~i)" A~)l
Jri'x [a~(A"i)" A~) a"(A"a~A~)
JJi' = -
~ ri' x F~"F~"
A") -
(8.23)
d'x
d'x
+ (0" A")(a~A~)].
(8.24)
JJi' =
-~
d'x
[(a~A")(a~A") - (a~A~)2]
(8.25)
152
Of course, this is still the same action. We have not made any changes
whatsoever. So all the problems that we mentioned earlier still remain with us.
As we mentioned, the problem originated because we had too
much freedom in defining the A~. We nee,Ho sacrifice some of this
freedom. We do this by introducing another term in the Lagrangian,
which is
(8.26)
d = -~ Jd'x
[(a~A")(8"A") -
(1- D(a~A~)2].
(8.27)
(1 - Da"(a~A~)
j" ,
(8.28)
+ {}~(}
a~A"(x) =
A~ =
a A ~-O
-,
~
(8.29)
8.4. Propagator
153
can be seen from Eq. (8.28). Since the current j~ is conserved, i.e.,
a~j~ = 0, taking the 4-divergence of Eq. (8.28) we obtain
(8.30)
We can now argue that appropriate boundary conditions can be imposed on A~ so that Eq. (8.29) is satisfied everywhere. In other
words, we can always transform A~ according to Eq. (8.12) so that
the new A~ satisfy Eq. (8.29). Thus, in order not to disturb Maxwell
equations, we are now restricted to use only those A~IS which satisfy
Eq. (8.29).
In passing, we note that the canonical momenta are now given
by
(8.31)
Obviously, lIo no longer vanishes identically. But we still have a
problem if we try to canonically quantize the theory. If we try to
mimic the technique employed for scalar fields and write
[A~(t,,,,),lI"(t,y)L = i&~&3(", - y),
(8.32)
it will imply
(8.33)
8.4
Propagator
Before introducing the gauge fixing term, we showed that the propa,gator could not be defined. Let us revisit this issue now, aided with
the gauge fixing term.
154
(8.34)
The equation for the Green's function will be
2
g"v = - [9""k = _ok
2g" v +
[0 (1 - D-~bk2] k"kv .
(8.37)
b=/T
(8.38)
(8.39)
Like the propagator for the scalar and fermion fields, there is a
problem if we try to find the propagator in co-ordinate space. The
problem can be solved in the same way, so that we get the Feynman
propagator:
(8.40)
Although the problem of non-existence of a gauge-invariant propagator is a classical one, this particular propagator lies outside the
purview of classical physics. One way to see this is to note that this
propagator is complex , due to the ie term in the denominator. That
8.4. Propagator
155
=]
= 0
=}
tDJ1-V (k)
.
'* ,D~u(k)
= - . k.2'9~u
+ 'lE. ,
i
= - k2 +
if:
(8.41 )
9,," -
k,.k
0
v]
(8.42)
The first one is usually referred to as the FeYIlIllan- 't Hooft gauge,
whose advantage is that the propagator is v~ry simple, contains just
one term, The second one is usually called the Laudau gauge, which
satisfies the relation k~ D~u(k) = 0, which ,illlplifies the calculations
III some cases.
We shall usually work in the = 1 gauge and explicitly indicate
if we change to another gauge choice. In this gauge, the action reads
.w = -~
(8.43)
= jJ1- ,
(8.44)
156
which look exactly like the equations for four massless scalar fields.
We can therefore utilize our knowledge of scalar fields and decompose
A".
8.5
d3k
[,I'(k)a (k)e- ik .x
J(21f )32wk r=O
L..J"
+ ""(k)at(k)e ik ' x ]
"
(8.45)
where
Wk =
k,
(8.46)
erties of A" are carried by these polarization vectors since the other
factors, as in the scalar case, transform like an overall Lorentz scalar.
,~
relations:
(8.47)
where sum on the repeated index r will not be assumed unless explicitly indicated, and the quantities
are defined as
<,
<0 =
(8.48)
-1,
L (rf~f;&I =
_gP-V .
(8.49)
r=O
157
,~(k) = _k~7TF-~("'1k",.n~)~n","
J(k . n)2
(8.50)
k2
= 1,2.
(8.51)
These last two are called the transverse polarization vectors. In the
frame where the third axis is chosen along the direction of propagation (i.e. along k) and n~ = (1,0,0,0), we find from Eq. (8.50) that
the longitudinal polarization vector fj is also along the third axis,
and we can write
'b =
,r
(1,0,0,0),
= (0,1,0,0),
,~ =
(D, 0, 1,0) ,
,~ =
(0,0,0,1).
(8.52)
if
,j = (0,1, i, 0)/)2,
''R =
(O,l,-i,O)/)2,
(8.53)
158
which represent left- and right circularly polarized radiation for propagation along the z-direction. The choice of (It and (~, on the other
hand, represents plane polarized radiatioll. One can also choose
something more general than those given in Eq. (8.53), e.g.:
(8.54)
[A,,(t,x),Av(t,y)!_ = n,
[n"(t,x),nv(t,y)L =
n.
(8.55)
[a,(k), a,(k')L = O.
[a((k), a!(k')
L= 0
(8.57)
8.6
(8,~j2)
and (8.56).
Physical states
159
by
a,(k) 10) =
(8.58)
(8.59)
(010) = 1 .
(8.60)
In the case of scalar fields, states defined 111 a similar way in Eq.
(3.39) have positive norm. This is however not guaranteed in this
case. Indeed, if we consider a state with polarization vector fO, we
find that
(k,Olk',O) =
=
(0 lao(k)a6(k') I0)
(01 [ao(k),a6W)L 0)
1
(8.61)
since the extra term included in the last step vanishes anyway due
to the definition of the vacuum state in Eq. (8.58). Using the commutation relation from Eq. (8.56) and recalling that (0 = -1, we
get
(8.62)
This norm is negative, which goes against all we know about quantum
medlanics.
The number of states also seem to pose a pU:lzle. Classical electromagnetic fields have only two independent degrees of freedom, as
mentioned earlier. However, in the quanti7,cd version, we seem to
have four polarization states which are linearly independent. Somehow there must be some redundancy in the definition of these polarization states.
These two problems are related, and in order to resolve them we
have to take into account one crucial fact which we swept under the
160
rug a little while ago. We are not quantizing Maxwell's electrodynamics, but a theory which agrees with it if and only if a~A~ = o.
But we cannot impose 8IJAIJ = 0 on the quantum operator Aw
However, Gupta and Bleuler realized that this is not really necessary in order to make a correspondence with the classical theory.
All that is needed is that for any two physical states 1>11) and 1>1I'},
the matrix element of a~A~ between the states vanishes:
(8.63)
Let us now define a physical state as any state which is annihilated
by the annihilation operator part of a~A~. We denote this part by
a~A~, in keeping with the notation introduced for scalar fields in Eq.
(5.44), and write this condition as
(8.64)
Of course, this will also imply
(>111 a A~- = 0 ,
(8.65)
where A~ is the part of the field operator which contains the creation
operator. Since a~A~ = a~A~ + a~A~, Eq. (8.63) is automatically
satisfied.
Let us now see what this means. From Eq. (8.45), we can write
3
k~<~(k)a,(k)e-ik.z
(8.66)
r=O
(8.67)
where we have used Eq. (8.46). In this frame, Eq. (8.66) will take
the form
a~A~(x)
= -i
Jj::)~~k
(8.68)
161
using the polarization vectors given in 8.5. Now, Eq. (8.64) will be
satisfied if
ao(k) I'IJ)
a3(k) I'IJ) ,
(8.69)
= -
A~.
(8.71)
We can now construct the total Hamiltonian and use normal ordering
to avoid zero-point catastrophes. Using the Fourier decomposition
of the fields A~ from Eq. (8.45), we obtain
:H:
J
=J
=
d k Wk
L (ca;(k)ac(k)
r=O
3
d k Wk
[~a;(k)ac(k) -
ab(k)ao(k)]
(8.72)
3
d k Wk
('IJ'
~ a;(k)ac(k)
'IJ)
(8.73)
Hence, for the matrix element of the Hamiltonian between two physical states, we find that only two polarization states really contribute.
And in fact, this is true for all other observables as well. Thus, we
seem to have cured the problem of counting of states mentioned earlier. Physical quantities do depend on two independent polarization
vectors only. Moreover, none of these two is the scalar polarization
state, so we need not bother about the problem of negative norm
states.
162
Q.
o Exercise 8.6 Find the total momentum oj the free photon jletd
PI~,
8.7
D""(k) = _
;'w .
(8.74)
k + tE
Using the completeness relation for the polarization vectors, we can
rewrite this as
3
D,w(k) =
1 .
L (,,::-;".
+ If r=O
(8.75)
,j.
n" = (1,0,0,0),
k" - (k . n)n"
v'(k . n)2
k2 '
(8.76)
D""(k) =
k2
1. [ ' "
+"
L.,
r=I.2
,~(k),~(k)
(8.78)
163
and
v"
kvk" - (k . n)(nvk" + kvn")
DR (k) =
k2[(k . n)2 _ k2j
In our chosen frame, nJ.t = gp.o and k . n
D'W( _ ') =
c x X
_
J
J
kO so we can write
4
d k DV"(k) -ik(x-x')
(2rr)4 C
e
d3k 9 vO"O
9
ik(x-x')
-(2rr)3
= -
k2
1 9 v0 9""
4rr Ix - x'i
(8.79)
J- e
dk o -iko(xo-x lO )
2rr
o(x o - x'D) .
(8.80)
q 2'
(8.81 )
IHint:
This can be done only as n limiting procedure. For exampLe, 'YOU ca.n luke the Fourier tra.nsform of the junction eXP~~;/A)
a.nd then tnke the limit .,\ - 00. Alternatiuely, think of the Green's
function for La.place's equation. I
J J
d4 x
(8.82)
where ji(x) and j(x') are two current densities interacting via the
photon field. The
part of the propagator contribotes
Dr
J
J
d4X
4rrlx - x'i
(8.83)
d4k ."
."
(884)
164
8.8
We can now summarize the Feynman rules for photons. For an internal photon, the rule is
k
~ =iDP"(k)
(8.85)
IJ.
v
irrespective of the direction of the momentum since the photon carries no charge. Sometimes we will put arrows on internal photon
lines to indicate the direction of momentum. For external photon
lines! the rule is
Ap(k)
~ =<p(k),
(8.86)
Ap(k)
~
=<~(k).
+ D\i(k))
(8.87)
,.=1,2
L
T=I,2
<~(k}<~(k) = -gP"
(8.88)
165
Chapter 9
Quantum electrodynamics
9.1
As we know from our discussion on scalar fields in Ch. 3, the Lagrangian of the free complex scalar field is invariant under a global
(i.e., space-time independent) phase rotation,
(9.1)
This is because in the Lagrangian,
(9.2)
a <pI appears in any term where <p appears. So tbe phases cancel
between <p and <pl. In Eq. (9.1), e is the unit of electric charge, which
is taken to be the charge of the proton. And Q is the charge of the
particle in this unit.
Such invariance exists in the Lagrangian of the free Dirac field:
(9.3)
Since in both the terms we have both 1/J and 1/J, this Lagrangian is
invariant under the transformation
(9.4)
As in the case of complex scalars 1 8 is a global parameter, i.e., the
value of is the same at all space-time points. The invariance of the
166
167
(9.5)
j" = eQ"rr"1/J .
q = eQ
d3 x 1/J11/J
f:
= eQ
d3 p
L,
fl (p)j;.(p)) , (96)
fl
where the In I in
arc the creation and annihilation operatc~s for
fermions and antifennions. In principle, this could be any charr;e that
comes as both positive and negative. For example it could be electron
number minus positron number, or proton number minus antiproton
number, or more generally lepton number or baryon number. We
= :foP
+ eQ(8"O)"rY"1/J.
(9.7)
(9.8)
If we now make a local transformation defined by
.,p -+ "p'
= e- ieQ9 (x)7/J
AJl
-+
A~,
(9.9)
168
z'
eQ(A~ - 8"0)1/J"I"1/J
(9.10)
(9.12)
If we look at only the terms containing photon field, we find exactly
the terms given in Eq. (8.l0L since the conserved current is given by
(9.13)
in this case, which was derived in Eq. (4.92). This confirms our
guess that A" can be thought of as the electromagnetic field. The
field theory with the Lagrangian of Eq. (9.12) is called quantum electrodynamics, or QED for short.
Let us summarize what we have done. \Ve had a global symmetry
in the free Lagrangian of the fermion field. We made this symmetry
local and demanded that the action remain invariant under this local symmetry. This required the introduction of the photon field A"
through a 1/J"I"A"1/J term. This procedure is known as gauging the
global symmetry, and the hypothesis that the action can be made
invariant by introducing new local fields is called the gauge principle. The field A" is called the gauge boson corresponding to the local
symmetry. Classically (which is how we implemented the gauge principle) the coefficient of this term, known as the coupling constant, is
arbitrary up to the normalization of fields. However, it so happens
169
that the electric charge of all fermions are integral multiples of some
fundamental charge. The problem of finding a suitable explanation
for charge quantization remains open to this day.
It may seem from OUf presentation that the procedure works
specifically for fermion fields. But that is not so. It works for any
other field with similar global symmetry. To appreciate that, let us
write Eq. (9.12) in the following form:
(9.14)
where Dp. is called the gauge covariant derivative:
D~
= a,. + ieQA~.
(9.15)
Of course, any non-derivative interaction term such as V(I) remains untouched by minimal substitution.
o Exercise 9.1 ShOUl tha.t the Lngrnnginn of Eq. (9.16) is immrio.nt
under lorol phase transformation!\, whe.re transforms b'Y Eq. (9.1)
with (J being a. function of space-time, and AI! tra.nsjorms according
to Eq. (9.11).
Exercise 9.2 Show that, ij 1/J tTOnsjOTm by Eq. (9.4) with a spacetime de.pendf.nt 9, a.nd A~ tru1tsjorms b'Y Eq. (9.11), the tra.n8jormaHan of DJ11P is the same o.s that oj 1/;, i.e.,
D'I-J'P
~/.'
where D~
= 8I-J + ieQA;l
= e - ieQ8 D JI'P,
.1.
(9.17)
170
9.2
Interaction Hamiltonian
-ieQ 'Y" .
(9.19)
Here and in general, we will ignore time directions when writing the
Feynman rule for vertices. The external arrows of the vertex will be
positioned as appropriate to the process being considered.
Let us consider the specific case of the electron field. The electron
charge is -e, which means Q = ~1. So for the interaction of the electron field with photons, the normal~ordered interaction Hamiltonian
is given by
(9.20)
To understand the nature of this interaction, let. liS use the nota
tion introduced in Eg. (5.44), where the creation and the annihilation
operator parts of the field operator where shown separately. If we do
a similar thing for the electron and the photon fields here, we will
obtain eight different terms. This will give rise to eight different kind
of events occurring at an interaction vertex, All eight are shown in
Fig, 9,1. Let us try to describe these terms in words and pictures.
First, consider the term :'I/J+ ')'~1P+A~;. The operator '1./)+ anni
hilates an electron, 7./J+ annihilates a positron, and A~ annihilates a
photon. Thus, this term describes a photon being annihilated along
with an electron-positron pair, 3.<; in Fig. 9.1a. Obviously, this cannot
be a physical process since the final state has no particles to carry
the energies of the particles in the initial stat.e.
Let us consider anothp.r term, e.g., :1j)_"'iJ.'I./I+A!~:. In this case, an
electron is annihilated, and an electron and a photon are created, as
171
~
(c) :VJ+ ')'"VJ_A~:
~
(e) :VJ+ ,),"VJ+A~;
Hamiltonian.
p'
pk,
(9.21 )
for some combination of signs on the right side. Squaring both sides,
172
we obtain
p'2=p2+e2p.k.
(9.22)
(9.23)
Exercise 9.3 In a.n arbitrary fTa.me, ShOUl that Eq. (9.23) implies
Ew
cos8 = p k .
(9.24)
9.3
We have already seen that it is not possible to obtain a physical pre>cess with only one QED vertex. In other words, the first order term
in the S-matrix expansion has no matrix element between physical
states. So in order to look at some physical processes we have to go
at least to the second order in the S-matrix expansion, Le., we need
to consider Feynman diagrams with two vertices. Let us see what
the poSsibilities are in that case.
As we mentioned, not all the lines occurring at any single vertex
can be external lines. So, let us first consider the possibility that
only one line at each vertex is internal. If the internal line happens
to be a photon, we will have only the four fermions as external lines.
Since charge conservation has to be maintained, there can be only
173
+ e+
e+ + e+
e-
--.,. e-
+ e+ e+
e+
+ e+
-+
-+
e-
,
(9.25)
+ 'Y
e+ + 'Y
e-
e- +e+
-+
~
-+
')'+')' -+
+ "y
e+ + 'Y,
e-
'"'(+"
e- + e+
(9.26)
(a)
(b)
Let us now consider the diagrams with two internal lines. Here
there are two possibilities. First, both internal lines could be fermion
174
lines, in which case we get the diagram of Fig. 9.2a. On the other
hand, one of the internal lines can be a photon , in which case we
get Fig. 9.2b. These are not diagrams for scattering, since the initial
state does not have two particles. These cannot be decay processes
either, since one particle cannot decay to one particle in the final
state. These are called self-energy diagrams. The first one, where
the external lines are photon lines, is called the se1f~energy diagram
for the photon, or sometimes vacuum polarization. The second one
is the self-energy diagram for the fermion. The interpretation of
these diagrams, along with the eva.luation of these amplitudes, will
be discussed in Ch. )2.
Sl') = - e'
J J
d'xI
d'x, g
[:(~-Y"1/>A"lz,:
:(1/>-yv1/>A v lz,:]
(9.27)
Use Wick's theorem to write the time ordered product appearing here
in tenns oj normal-ordered products. ldentiJ1l aU the processes dis
cussed aoo'lle o.s different tenns in the Wick. e7;pa1'\s'ion.
9.4
Electron-electron scattering
+ e- (1'2)
~ e- (p',)
+ e- (p;) ,
(9.28)
175
where PI, P2, etc. are the 4-momenta of the different particles. This is
one of the processes which occur at the second order in the S-matrix
expansion. There are two Feynman diagrams corresponding to this
process, shown in Fig. 9.4. The two diagrams come from the same
S-matrix term, as in Fig. 6.4.
'-(PI)
(a)
Figure 9.4: lowest order
(b)
diagrams for electron-electron scattering
in QED.
176
Chapter 9.
Quantum eJectrodyn8111;cs
Now yre use the relations jYU(p) = mu(p) and u(p)p = mu(p), which
were-given in Eqs. (4.46) and (4.48), and find that this expression
vanishes. As a result, the terms involving k~ in the propagator do
not contribute to the amplitude. Similarly, for the other diagr8111
the terms involving k~ do not contribute. Since these are the terms
which contain the gauge-fixing parameter . we have shown that the
amplitude does not depend on~. We are thus left with only the
g~v-term in the propagators, and this gives the following expression
for the total amplitude:
(9.33)
where we have written tt, for u(p'tl etc. This expression is clearly
antisymmetric if we interchange the two electrons in the final state.
Since the denominator in the second term can also be written 88
(PI - p2)2, it is straightforward to see that the expression is also antisymmetric under the interchange of the two electrons in the initial
state. This is of course how it should be, since the electrons are
fermions.
177
where
TIl =
Tr[(P, +mhv(P',
+mh~I'lr[(p,+mhV(p~+mh~]'
Til
(9.38)
, ,
(9.39)
PI . P' = P, . P,
and other similar equations, which follow from momentum conservation, PI + P2 = P; + P2' Similarly, the second term can be obtained
by interchanging P'J and P2. which gives
T"
= 32[(1"
. P2)'
PI .1';)).
(9.40)
178
Let us now look at the other two terms. Since an odd number of
"'(-matrices have vanishing trace, we can write
TI2
[PI"!VP2"!"P2"!VP; "!,,]
+m 2Tr [PI"!Vp2,,!""!V"!V + PI"!v"!vp2"!v"!v + PI"!v"!""!vP;"!,,
+"! v.J.'
l' 2"!".J.1'2"!v"!,, + "!v.J.'
I""!""!vl'.J. 0" + "! v"!v.J.1""!VI'.J.'I"!" ]
+m 4Tr [,,!V"!""!V,,!,,] .
(9.41)
= Tr
T I,
[PIP,"!vP2P;"!,,]
+4m' Tr [P,P2 + P,P, + PIP; + P,P2 + P'IP2 + PIP,]
_2m 4 Tr [,,!v,,!,,]
-32pI . P2 P2 . p, + 32m' [PI . P2 + PI . P2 + PI' PI] - 32m 4 .
-2 Tr
(9.42)
Note that this contribution is unaffected under the interchange
P2, so T,I must be the same as this. Thus we obtain
p',
(9.43)
using Eq. (9.39) and similar equations to simplify the expression.
Differential cross-section in the eM frame
We now need to insert these expressions into the general formula for
elastic cross-sections in the eM frame, Eq. (7.107):
do
d!l =
1 --,
(9.44)
641T'S!.4f1 ,
(P I (PI -
PII ) ' =
PI2 + PI"
PI .PI ,
I )
(9.45)
179
All these dot products can be expressed in terms of the Mandelstarn variables, of which only twa are independent. Here we chOOBe
not to use the Mandelstam variables, but the scattering angle II, as
shown in Fig. 7.1, as one of the parameters. The energy of any of the
four external particles will be the other parameter. Note that each
particle has the same energy E in the eM frame. We then obtain,
for the dot products appearing in 111 2, the following expressions:
PI . P2
= E2 + p2 ,
PI . PI,
= E 2 - P 2 cos II ,
PI . P2I = E2 + P 2 cos II ,
111 2 = 2e
p4
(9.46)
= _2 p 2(1 -
006(1) etc.
+ -,=--'--,=---,c.....:.-'='---T.(1"-+"'::':'cos::":""11)"2-=-'--"---''''--''''::':':'':''!+2
sin II
(9.47)
The differential cross section in this frame is then given by Eq. (9.44),
with s = 4E2. The total cross section is obtained by integrating over
the angular variables. But since the final particles are identical,
only half the phase space is available, which means that II should be
integrated from 0 to 1r /2.
o Exercise 9.5 Argue th.at the. croS8 section for the positron-poaitTOT\
8CQ.ttering should be. the same.
o Exercise 9.6 Show tha.t in the. ultra.-relo.ti\lutic limit E ~ m , the.
differential croBS-section becomu
(9.48)
180
9.5
Electron-positron scattering
+ e+(p;).
(9.49)
This process also occurs at the second order in the S-matrix expansion. There are two diagrams corresponding to this process, shown
in Fig. 9.5.
e-(ptl
e-(p;)
A(kb )
e+(-1'2)
e+(-p2
(b)
(a)
LII. = IU(P',)(ie-y~)u(pI)]iD~V(k.)[v(p2)(ie'Yv)v(p;)).
(9.50)
iJlb = IV(P2)(ie-y~)u(ptl]iD~V(kb)[U(p;)(ie-yv)V(P2)]'
(9.51)
P;
where kb = PI + 1'2 =
+ P2' The two diagrams are related by
a fermion exchange - the initial e+ is exchanged with the final eta get diagram (b) from diagram (a). Therefore the two amplitudes
should be added with a relative minus sign between them.
As 'before, the k~kv terms in the propagator do not contribute
because the spinors satisfy Eqs. (4.46) and (4.48), and we are left
with the following expression for the total amplitude:
JI
= JI. = e2 {
JIb
IU;'Y~udlv2'Y~V21 _ [V2'Y~Ul][U"'Y~V2J},
(PI - p;)2
(PI
+ P2)2
(9.52)
181
T"
T 22
T2
'
T 21
IAfl 2 in terms
= Tr [(PI
= Tr[(P1
= Tr [(PI
= Tr[(P1
We have seen how to calculate traces like these in 9.4. The results
can be obtained directly by interchanging P2 and -Po in Eq. (9.36):
(9.55)
182
1...K1
2e'{
(E 2 + p2)2
+ (E2 + p2cosB)2 _
2m 2p 2(1_ co. B)
2E'
(9.56)
,0
du
dO
",2
1 + cos
8E2 (
. ,0
sm -
2
+
1 +cos 2 0
2
~)
2 cos'
. B
sm 2 2
(9.57)
Earlier we discussed the elastic scattering process for the electronpositron pair. If the energy of the incoming electron-positron pair is
high enough, the scattering need not be elastic. In the final state,
we can obtain a particle-antiparticle pair corresponding to a ,higher
mass. Among the known elementary charged particles, the electron
is the lightest, and the next lightest is the muon. Here, we calculate.
the cross-section for muon-antimuon production, although the analysis can be used with minor modification for the production of any
fermion-anti fermion pair.
e-(kIl
1l-(pIl
A(k)
the process
e- e+ - jJ.-Il+ in QED.
183
There is only one diagram at the lowest order, shown in Fig. 9.6.
The muon has t.he same charge as the electron, and so its vertex
with the photon would also be the same as that for the electron.
The Feynman amplitude can then be written as
.4 =
(9.58)
1.41 2 = 4~ L. 1..#1 2
spIn
e
4;2 Tr
m"hp]
4e
[k 1Ak p + kPI k 2A - 9 APk I ' k2 ]
.2
2
X
m~)]
8e2 [ (k , pd 2
S
+ (k .l
P2) 2
2
+ m"k,
. k2 ] .
(9.59)
k l P2 = E(E + pcosO).
k , . k2 = 2E 2 .
(9.60)
= 4E2 , and
4[1+ ;2 (p2COS20+71l~,)]
=.' [ 1 + cos' 0 + m2
E~ (1 -
cos 0)
(9.61)
184
o2~m~
4m~
2]
1 - - [ l+cos 28+--{I-c05
8)
da= dfl4s
(9.62)
38
(9.63)
9.7
(9.64)
where ,( k) denotes the photon and f' denotes any other particle that
may be present in the final state, whereas the dots denote any other
factors of the interaction Hamiltonian that might be present. Once
we use the analog of the one-particle states shown in 6.2, we will
obtain
(9.65)
185
Thus the quantity we called M ~ must have arisen from the quantity
inside the integral sign, after factoring out the initial a:nd final state
factors.
Now imagine replacing "~(k) with k~ in the expression above.
This will give
-ik~
rrx ; ; ; , (I'
= -
1J~(x)1 i)
(8"e;"%)
rrx
rrx ; ; ; , (I'
l8"j~(x) ... \ i) .
(9.66)
The last step is obtained by partial integration. Since the other factors, represented by the dots, are not at the point x, the derivative
does not act on them. This shows that the quantity under consideration vanishes since 8"j~(x) = O. Thus if we replace the polarization
vector in an S-matrix element by the corresponding momentum vec~
tor, the amplitude goes to zero. In other words,
(9.67)
Similarly, we can prove that the same relation would hold if there is
a photon in the initial state. Said in another way, if we make the
substitution
(9.68)
in the amplitude, the co-efficient of t') shouid be zero.
For physical photons, the consequence of using the Lorenz gauge
condition translates in momentum space to the relation
k. =
o.
(9.69)
9.8
Compton scattering
+ 1'(k, r)
~ e- (P', 8')
+ 1'(k' , r ' ) .
(9.70)
186
..,(k)
..,(k)
c(p)
..,(k ' )
..,(k' )
(b)
(a)
U(. =
+;_
[U(pl)(ie.-,~) P
LK'b = [U(pl)(ie.-,V) P_ ~~
m (ie.-,V)U(P)]
<;,~(k')<rv(k),
_ m (ie.-,~)u(P)] <;,~(k'l<rv(k).
(9.71)
.A = _e u(p')
2-( ') [J ,.
= -e up
(9.72)
for the total Feynman amplitude, where we have used the shorthands
<v
=frv(k) ,
<~
fr,~(k').
(9.73)
f---+(
1
I
(9.74)
187
Gauge invariance
~' =
-e 2u(p') [U"
+ '11")
p+-m
U + 11)
(9.75)
Thus,
Let us look, for example, at the co-efficient of 19. In the first term,
we can write
If.
(p+-m) - (p-m).
(9.77)
Since this expression operates on' u(p) to the right, the second parenthesis gives zero while acting on it. The other part cancels the propagator, and so we are left with just 1". Similarly, in the second term,
we can write
(9.78)
Here also, the first parenthesis vanishes because of the spinar on its
left. The other part cancels the propagator but for a sign, using
p + k = p' + k' from momentum conservation. Thus, this cancels the
first te~m. One can similarly see that the co-efficient of {j'. vanishes,
and so does the co-efficient of
-a{)'.
188
<'"=(0,.')
= (O,f),
(9.79)
in the Lab frame in which the initia.l electron is at rest. The advantage of this choice is that
pt=O=pt
l
,
(9.80)
= 2p fU(p).
(9.81)
This derivation makes no assumption about the choice of the polarization vector or frame. If however we stick to the choice of Eq.
(9.80), this expression vanishes. The argument is no different if the
polarization vector on the right is f'. So the amplitude of Eq. (9.72)
can be written as
.A =
-e 2 u(p')Fu(p) ,
(9.82)
F=
nl Iln' .
--+
2pk
2p'k'
(9.83)
where
1.A1 2 = ! L I.AI'
2 spin
(9.85)
189
(9.86)
Since in the Lab frame
pk=mw,
p. k' = rnw',
(9.87)
where wand w' are the initial and final photoll energics. we can write
2
1.411
8m2
[Til
w2
22 + T l2 + T 21 ]
+ Tw'2
ww'
(9.88)
In this formula, Til through T2\ arc various traces, which we evaluate
now.
(9.89)
We first show that the term proportional to .",2 is zero. For physical
states of polarization, we can ~se II = (2 = -1. no... given in Eq.
(8.51). This enables os to write
Tr [l'm~l'] = - Tr !I'm']
= - k 2 Tr lI'l'l
= 0,
(9.90)
(9.91)
(9.92)
190
Til
= 8mw
[2(k.' ')2
+ mw']
(9.93)
T 22
Tr [(p'
+ m)/f"(p + rn)/T/]
(9.94)
Tn
= -8mw'
T l2
[2(k'. ,)2 -
and
T21'
mw] .
(9.95)
T l2 = Tr [(p'+m)l'l(p+rn)"W/]
T21 = Tr [(p' + m)/f' I'(p + m)/fl'J
(9.96)
T21
Tr
(9.97)
T l2
(9.98)
In the last two traces, we can drop the [Jla.~5 term in the parcnthesp~<;
since it involves all odd !lumber of ...,-matriccs. Then lIsing t.he cyclic
property of trace and the relations in E'ls. (n.6n), (n.SO) and (9.84),
191
(9.99)
(9.100)
(j + m)l'lf.i('p + m) =
(9.101)
where we have used Eqs. (9.80) and (4.65). Putting this back and
noting that the term proportional to m has an odd number of "(matrices, we obtain
1st term in T I2
= 2pk'IT
[i'PiI'If.'i]
(9.102)
Til
['ww
12
-I"H'I 2 = e 4 - + -W + 4( . )
- 2 .
w'
(9.104)
192
1~12
du
1
dn=641T 2(m+w-wcosO)2
(9.105)
'
where 0 is the angle at which the photon is scattered, i.e., the angle
between the directions of the incoming and the outgoing photons.
Noting that the energy of the scattered photon is given by
,
w
w = 1 + (w/m)(1 _ cosO)'
(9.106)
which follows from the general expression given in Eq. (7.115), we
can write the differential cross-section as
~ (W')2 [W' ~ 4.
2] .
du =
+ +
<')2 _
(9.107)
dO
4m 2
w
w
w'
This is called the Klein-Nishina formula, after the people who derived
it.
The total cross-section can be obtained by integrating over the
angular variables after we substitute w' from Eq. (9.106). But there
is a word of caution. In the expression for the differential crosssection, the dot product of the initial and final polarization vectors
appear. This may also depend on the angle O. Below, we calculate
this dependence explicitly in a specific case.
~L
r,r'
[<,(k) . <,,(k')j' =
~ [L <,;(k)<,j(kl]
r
[L <",(k')<"j(k')] .
r'
(9.108)
193
For either of these sums, we can take a look at the various choices of
polarization vectors given in 8.5, which give
(9.109)
where the sum is over transverse, i.e., the physical polarization states
only. Using this for the real polarization vectors that we are considering here, we obtain finally
~ (I + cos 2 0) ,
(9.110)
d"l
dO
unpol
Ot
2 (W')2 [w'
= 2m2
:;
+ w'
2 ]
- sin 8
(9.111)
ounpol
21fOt
-2-
[
(
+r
. 2
2 )2 + "2
1+ r
T
where' = w/m. If
2(1
+ r)
2 .,
ro
,2
In(1
+ 2,)
. (9.112)
ounpol
= 3m 2 = 0.665
10
-24
cm.
(9.113)
194
9.9
(9.114)
Nothing new has been done yet.
p'
+Ze
Figure 9.8:
Scattering
of
electron
by
nucleus
of charge +Ze.
(9.115)
We know from 9.3 that the dynamical part does not contribute
because of energy-momentum conservation. So we are left with only
195
d q e ;q.ZA" ( q ) .
(211")3
A" =- A"(
x ) --
(9.117)
15(1)1
e- (p))
= ie
x
1
(1
d"x
j2E'V
d3q
(211")3 e
u(p')e;P''
.qz 4 ( ) )
1
-'p., (P)
", q
j2EVe
u
. 211"6(E-E') 1~ 63(
,
- ')4 )
j2EVj2E'V
q
q - p + p)u(p ",(q u(P)
te
9.118
where
(9.119)
place (211")46 4(p. - PI) by. (211")6(E; - E/). This implies that
the 4-momentum is not conserved at the vertex. This is not a
failure of the theory. Rather, it means that we are ignoring the
3-momentum transferred to the nucleus.
(9.120)
o Exercise 9.8 The nucleus is at rest in the Lab frame. ]f the energy
E of the initial electron is negligible compared to the mo.s! M oj the
nucleus, ShOUl from the kinematics that the energy ' of the final
electron is a.pproximateLy equa.l to the initial energy.
196
Putting this back into Eq. (9.118) and squaring the S-matrix
element, we obtain the transition rate to be
ISld
a(E - E')
IT
--2
(9.121)
la(E -
Ell 2 = ~ a(E -
E'),
(9.122)
T being the time in which we perform all the calculations. The cross
section can then be written, in analogy with Eq. (7.88), as
1
dn
~~
= 2p (211')32E'
--2
Ell4f1 ,
(211')a(E -
(9.123)
--2
1611'2 14f1
(9.124)
A~(x) = (Ze
,0,0,0)
411'r
(9.125)
A~(q) = (~~,o,o,o)
(9.126)
Then,
(9.127)
9.10. Bremsstrahlung
197
Therefore,
1~12 = 27r2(Za~2
p4 sin4 _
47r 2(Za)2
p' sin'
(9.129)
da
dO =
(Za)2
4p' sin'
~2
(9.130)
9.10
Bremsstrahlung
198
pi
+k
p-k
~q=p'+k-p
~q=p'+k-p
+Ze
+Ze
=1 \m
p
I(k)] u(p).
(9.133)
The matrix element for the transition is then
2EV
:v
2E'V
Vd3 p'Vd3 k
(211")
6'
~ J(.
2wV
(9.134)
(9.135)
da =
In the soft photon limit w '" 0, using Eq. (9.81) and similar
equations, we can write the Feynman amplitude as
2
p.,
p., ]
iJ( '" -ie u(p')4e(q)u(p) [ - I
- p'k
pk
= -teLa -, - - - .
p .,
p.,
p'k
pk
(9.136)
9.10. Bremsstrahlung
199
du
dO =
(du)
dO
[p'"
p.
<>
f d k
]2
(2,,)2 1m ~ p'. k - p' k
+ .. , , (9.137)
Chapter 10
ID.1
qq'
m dt 2 = 4rrr' x ,
200
(10.1)
10.2. Parity
201
x--x,
(10.2)
this equation remains invariant. This operation is called parity operation, and therefore parity is a symmetry of Eq. (10.1). Another
discrete symmetry which keeps the same equation invariant is time
reversal l which is defined to be the transformation
-+ ~
t.
(10.3)
Since Eq. (10.1) involves a double rlerivatiVl' of lime on the left hand
side, it is unaffected by the change of .':iign of tillle.
Apart frolll havillg parity and time rev('r~al ~ymmctrics, Eq.
(10.1) is also invariant jf we change til(' sign of the charges of each
particle:
q ---; - q,
q -
(10.4)
- If
10.2
Parity
10.2.1
til1ll'
l'l'll('l'RUl <In'.
Lonntz
Let us start with free Lagrangians and sec wbd.lwr they rcspect the
parity symmetry, COil sider first the free Lag:rang:irtll of a. real scalar
field, Eq. (3,5). \Vc write it more pxplir.itl.y IIl'n~, showillg the time
and the space derivatives separately:
(10.5)
lI1ea."llrill~ t.lliugs
i=(t.-x).
!Ising a system of
( 10.6)
202
Since
as a constant
linear transformation on the fields,
,
p(x)
= P(X)p-1
= ryp(i) ,
(10.7)
(10.8)
P~(X)p-l
[(8,p(x))' - (V',,p(x)f -
m'~(x)],
(10.9)
(1010)
The factor ryp is called the intrinsic parity of the particle corresponding to the field , whose values can be 1. For a complex scalar field,.
we obtain in the same way that ryp can be allY arbitrary phase. But
parity operation done twice is the identity operation, which restricts
ryp to the values 1. From the free Lagrangian, there is no way to
choose between these two possibilities for intrinsic parity. We will see
later that this need not be the case when interactions are introduced.
o Exercise 10.2 Cnlcula.te the effect of the parity o"pt:Ta.tor on the
cT'wtion and o.nnihilo.tion operators of <1>. As:mming that the uacuum
is parity inuo.riant, show that the one-pm'tide stutes tro.nsfonn as
Plk) = rypl-k).
10.2.2
(1011)
(10.12)
10.2. Parity
203
(10.13)
(10.15)
p=
'IP')'o,
(10.16)
where 'IP is called the intrinsic parity of the fermion. The parity
transformation properties of free fermion fields are then
1/Jp(x)
= P,p(x)p-l
= 'IPI'O,p(x).
(10.17)
Exercise 10.3 Use the Dirac matric.es and the plane-wa.lle solution
in the. DirQ.c-Pa.uli 're'PTf'.sentation to uerify that
(10.18)
o Exercise 10.4
A~~ly
the
~arity
204
10.2.3
We now turn to the Lagrangian of the free photon field and examine
whether it is invariant under the parity symmetry. For this purpose,
let us rewritf' the Lagrangian,
y = -
~F;wFIW
4
-~
= -
~(o"Av) [(0"
AV
[(doAiHaOAi - a i AO)
(tJ" A")]
+ (a,.1o)(tJ'A"
+(aiAj)(d'Aj - (PA i )]
- aO Ai)
(10.19)
= AO(i).
= -A(i),
(10.20)
= -A(\(i) ,
= AU).
(10.21)
A'!,(x)
PA"(:r)P-'
AI>(J:)
PA(J:)p-l
or by
Ay,(x)
PAO(x)p
Ap(J:)
PA(x)P-1
From the poiut of view of the free field t.h('ory, we call1lot choose
between tile two. HOW{'VN, once we int.rodll(,{~ the sources allfJ find'
solutions for the cl('ctromagnetic field ill some specific ca...-;es. the sit.~
uation change::;. For exa.mple,
at the origin, the snllltit)ll for
'I
E = --Jx.
47l"r
at rc::;t
( 10.22)
o Exercise 10.5
10.2. Parity
10.2.4
205
Interacting fields
We have thus shown that for all kinds of fields discussed earlier, the
free Lagrangians obey parity invariance. Of course, free Lagrangians
are no good for describing any physical phenomena, since physical
phenomena are interactions. The question therefore is whether parity
remains a good symmetry, i.e., Eq. (10.8) holds in t.he presence of
interactions. The answer depends on what the interactions arc. Here
we will discuss a few examples to gain some experience in this matter.
Let us st.art with a tht.'Ory of fcrmions amI real scalars, with an
interaction term
2iot = - h>/J>/J"',
( 10.23)
..Lint
, , '
= - h
(10.24)
tjJ"(s1/)(j>.
-Lillt
= - h'
~
I -<
tp"(0~)4) -
'1 IHIi
, ..I
AlJ')
( 10.25)
206
(1O.26)
1'5
Exercise 10.6 In. the absence oj a mass term. Jor th.e jermion, the
third equ.tion of Eq. (10.15) need not be .ati,jied.
= 1]P")'0'1'5
.'in' =
-eQl/J1'~l/JA~
= -eQ [l/J1'ol/JAo -
l/J1'il/JAi]
(10.27)
)1'i('IP1'ol/J(x)) =
-1/J(xhl/J(x). (10.29)
Using these, we find that the interaction Lagrangian is in fact invariant under parity if the parity transformation rules for Ao and Ai are
given by Eq. (10.20). Fields transforming like the photon field under
parity are called vector fields. If on the other hand there are spin-I
fieids which transform like Eq. (10.21) under parity, they would be
called axial vector fields.
207
o Exercise 10.7 Shom that, if JOT some spin.-l field Ell> the interaction with. jermions is gillen b-y
(10.30)
'Where a is 0. constant, the La.gra.ngian is parity inuarianl prouided
B~ is an o.xio.llJeetor fleld.
Exercise 10.8 Show tha.t, ij fOT some 8pin-l jield Zj.l, the interaction with jermions \s giuen by
(10.31)
10.3
Charge conjugation
10.3.1
Free fields
For scalar fields, this just means replacing 4> by 4>t, and it is easy
to see that the free Lagrangian of a scalar field is invariant under
this operation. More generally, we can define the effect of the charge
conjugation operation to be
(10.32)
208
For the photon field which is also a real field, the free Lagrangian
again demands that charge conjugation is a symmetry provided the
intrinsic charge conjuga.tion factor is either t 1 or .. 1. When we bring
in interactions, we find that the Maxwell equations are invariant only
if we choose
A6(x)
= CA~(x)C-l
= - A~(x)
(10.33)
which we can call "". But even this cannot. replace'" because "'.
does not have the same Lorentz transformation property as ,p. This
can be seen as follows. In 4.2, we showed that under a Lorentz
transformation
(10.34)
the spinor fields transform like
""(x') = exp ( -~O'~"W~") 1/)(x).
(10.35)
(10.36)
a~v
This, however, is not an impasse. Even for the case of parity, ,pp
and ,p were not proportional. Rather they were related by a matrix
P, which was defined in Eg. (10.13). In the same manner, here we can
ask whether the charge conjugation transform of the field ,p, which
will be called 1/)C, can be related to ,p' by a matrix. III other words,
we will look for a unitary matrix C such that 1/Jc can be defined as
T
"-c
opC =
'10 '" ,
(10.37)
209
with the condition that ,pc transforms the same way as ,p under
Lorentz transformations. The appearance of "'YO in this equation is
purely conventional. We could have called the combination (1J by
some name C' and proceeded to look for C'.
The essential property of the desired matrix ( was already suggested in Ex. 4.6 (p 54). We now derive this property for the reader
who has not already solved that exercise. We want >!Jc, as defined in
Eq. (10.37), to transform according to Eq. (10.35). ThiS means
(1J >!J'(x') = exp ( -~a""w"") (1ci >!J(x).
We know from Eq. (10.36) how
ten as
>!J. transforms.
(10.38)
( T
( 1oT d 1J.J,I
= -oJ.lV 'Yo
(1040)
or
.
T
( -1 a~1I ( = - "YoT
alJv"Yo = -
0Jw
(1041)
1"
= -1" '
(10.42)
[1",1"]~ =
[1!,1:L = -
h~,1!L
(10.43)
210
o
o
=..,i,
be antisymmetric.
C = UCU .
(10.46)
(10.47)
C = i-y0.
Ap
(10.49)
C..,ri u;(p)
= v.(p) ,
C-yriv:(p) = u.(p).
(10.50)
10.3.2
211
Interactions
Real scalar fields are invariant under charge conjugation, so any interactions containing only real scalar fields will of course be invariant
under the same operation. For theories with complex scalar fields ,
the interactions are invariant if they contain only the combination
4>f 4>. Let us now check a non-trivial case, viz., that of the interactions
involving fermion fields.
Because of Lorentz invariance the fermion fields always appear in
pairs, in bilinears of the form
(10.51)
with some constant matrix F sandwiched between them. We ha'le
kept the bilinear in a general form in which the fermion fields ..pI
and !/J2 need not be the same. In order to find the charge conjugation properties of fermion interactions, we need to know how such a
bilinear behaves under charge conjugation.
The charge conjugated form for the bilinear above is
(10.52)
For any fermion field !/J,
.1.
'+'C
.,,1
'+'c1'o
.J.T
(10.53)
using Ct = C-I. Recalling now that ')'0 = 1'J and using the definition
of the matrix C from Eq. (10.42),' we obtain
(10.54)
Thus for the expression in Eq. (10.52), we can write
(..p,)cF(!/J2)c
= -..pic'PC1'ci!/Ji
(10.55)
This looks very different from the bilinears that we have seen SO far,
where the field at the left has a bar on it. But it can be put into that
form. To see that let us start with a bilinear of the form !/Ji M')'ci ..pi,
and rewrite it by explicitly putting the spinor indices:
..pi M')'ci!/Ji
= - (..p2);
(10.56)
212
(10.58)
(10.60)
using Eq. (10.58) in the last step. We see that this is the same as
the original interaction if hW = -h. Which means that even for a
complex coupling constant h, this Lagrangian can be made charge
conjugation invariant by appropriately choosing 1JiP'
Exercise 10.15 ShOUl that the intf'.Tndion term in QED is in.ua:rianl under charge conjugation prouidcd A~ transjorms us in. Eq.
(10.33).
IDA
Time reversal
10.4.1
Antilinearity
213
involved than the earlier ones. Let us explain why. Suppose we are
considering a physical process where some initial state J>II} turns into
some final state I>II'}. In the time reversed picture, the final state
would become the initial one, and vice versa. In other words, if
we denote the time reversal operator by T, time reversal symmetry
would imply
(10.61)
(10.62)
for all complex numbers al and a2. Then the operator is linear. If
on the other hand the operator is such that
( 10.64)
for all al and a2, the operator is antilinear. The time reversal operator, since it is anti-unitary, must be anti linear, as the theorem tells
us.
10.4.2
Free fields
214
= (-t,x) = -x,
(10.65)
where .T. wa.~ introduced ill Eq. (10.6). As ill the ca,:se of parity, the
intrinsic phase associated with time reversal can be arhitrary for both
spin-O and spin-l fields as long as we consider the free Lagrangiall
only. For the photon field. the interactions dictal(' that under time
reversal one should have
T A(:r)T- 1 = - A( -x). (10.66)
Tj(1:)T- 1 = -j(-i).
since j represents the flow of charge
wherciL"'; jU
(10.67)
charge density.
In order to discuss time reversal propt'ftics of Dirac fields, we
(10.68)
+i-yci-yT. V x
The complex conjugates of thf! l'-rnatrices, a..':i well a.s -i, have appeared in the first step becallse of the antilinearity of the operation.
In the following ~tCPI we have used the hermiticity properties of the
I-matrices to turn the complex conjugates iHto transpo:-;es. In kp.p.ping with the notatiolis used for parity alld charge conjugation, we
will define
(10. 70)
for some matrix T which is independent of space-time. Then we call
write Eg. (10.69) as
T2'(x)T- 1 = tPt(-i)TI
10.4.
Time
215
rl~versa.J
T Y(x)T 1 = Y(-i).
This can be ar;hievcd if the matrix T
satisfif~s
TtT = J.
T t 1'0T'YiTT = 'YU)'I
Tt -yJ"T = -Yo.
The first of these
trix - both unitary
unitary matrices. In
po,es by Eg. (10.42)
then gives
(10.72)
th' relatiolls
'
(10.73)
equations says that T has to he a unitary maand anti-unitary operat.ors are represented by
the other two equatioll:), we replace the tra.nswhich define, the matrix C. The ia,,;t equation
(10.74)
This equation ca.n be rewritten a.s,
(10.75)
[CT, -Yol. = U.
~quatioll
of Eq. (10.7:.1)
Cilll
1)/~
fOfm
[CT, -yd. =
o.
( 10.76)
Thll~.
t.he
tillH'
[{'versal Iuolwrty of a
(10.78)
Exercise 10.16
COllliidt'T lUlO
diITI:nnl
ITJlnslllt.(lt:i.(Jll~
oj the
,~
tfLatric,r.s rdnh~cl h1J )j' = U'j,U t . Sh.ow t.h II I tit.' li.mc'-n,lllT.'U'.cl DiraC'
.fld<l8 in the lUlo rqllT:'lf'.llto.lioll::l llT'f~ n1Clfl'lt II'!I Hit, l'.lru.ntlO1l.
(10.70)
216
10.4.3
(10.80)
Using the definition of the matrix C from Eq. (10.42) to write C'YJ
-')'0(, we can put it in the form
T (h 1/>, (x)F1/>,(x)) T- l = hO
(10.81)
where
Fr = 'YsCF"C-I'Ys .
We now list the form for
F
Fr
FT for various
"Yi
po.~sibilities for
')'0')'5
(10.82)
F:
(10.83)
(10.84)
The chargp. eQ is a real number, so complex conjugation does not affect it. For the field operators, we can use the table in Eq. (10.83) and
the transformation properties of the photon field from Eq. (10.66) to
see that this interaction is indeed invariant under time-reversal.
10.5. CP
217
10.5
CP
We have already discussed the discrete opprations C, P and T separately. Sometimes it is useful to talk abollt combinations of these
operations. One such combination which is very useful is CP, i.e.,
the product of charge conjugation and parity.
The transformation of different fields under CP need not be discussed in detail. They can be obtained by combining the results of
P and C operations, both of which have hflP.1l discussed earlier. For
example, for a fermion field, we would obtain
CP >jJ(x) (Cp)-l = CP >jJ(x) P-'C- I = C7IVyOljJ(i)C-1
= ryP"(oCVJ(i)C '
= 71J>IIC1'IlC1'J' >jJ'(i).
(10.85)
(10.86)
= '1pryc
(10.87)
0. fermion
jietd to show tho.t, if two fermion fields 1/JI and th ha.ue the same
intrinsic CP phasc, the general fermion biliTtt'-O.r c.o1tstrucled from
them lrn.nslorms the following wo.'Y under CP:
(10.88)
oy the: relation
(10.89)
Using the results of the pre:uious problem, verily th.e foLlowing table
giuing Fcp corresponding ua.rio'Us possibilitie8jor F:
PCP
o
1',
'Yo
"Ii
"Ii
(10.90)
218
CPA(x)(CP)-1 = A(i).
(10.91)
With this and Eq. (10.88), we can show that the QED interaction is
CP invariant. But it is somewhat of an unnecessary exercise since we
have already known that the QED Lagrangian is invariant separately
under C and P.
The more interesting point to note is that if there is a spin-1
field which has both vector and axial vector type interactions with
fermions, as for example was given in Eq. (10.31), the interaction is
not separately invariant under C and P, but is invariant under the
combined operator CPo
10.6
CPT
(10.92)
In this case, let us first see how the photon field transforms under
this operation. Using the transformation property of the photon field
under C, P and T separately, we obtain
(10.93)
Moving over now to Dirac fields, we find
=-
'/T'ICPC-I')'5C1jJ'( -x),
(10.94)
10.6. CPT
219
where
1)6
= 1)cprn' = 1)C1)P1JT
(10.96)
e "'(xl e- I = e "'(x)t'Yo e- I =
=
,.T( -x ) 'YsT'YoT ,
-1)60/
(10.97)
using the fact that 'Yo and 'Ys are hermitian matrices. Assuming for
the moment that we can assign the same CPT-phase to all fermions,
we obtain
using the identity of Eq. (10.57) at the last step. Let us write this as
(10.99)
where
( 10.100)
using the notation FI = 'YoFt'Yo that was introduced in Eq. (7.15).
The significance of this symbol is that the hermitian conjugate of the
general bilinear discussed above is given by
(10.101)
If there is a term in the Lagrangian containing the bilinear WI F"'2,
there must also be a term containing the bilinear ""FI"'I since the
220
10.6. CPT
221
Chapter 11
Suppose we want the matrix element of the electromagnetic current operator between two physical or on-shell states of a fermion
of charge eQ. Using the expression for the electromagnetic current
from Eq. (9.13), we obtain
(p',s'lj,,(xllp,s) = eQ (P',s'10(.rh,,4{rllp,s)
e -lqZ
,
.j2EpV.j2Ep,Vu"(p)eQ/,,,u.,(p).
(11.1)
Here we have used the free field normalized states of 6.2, and written
q=p-p',
(11.2)
".
(11.3)
So
J"
(0) is parametrized
(11.4)
",eI, that
-iq-z
(p', s'U,,(x)1 p, s) =
e
u,,(p') ef,.(/I,p') u.,(p) (11.5)
.j2" V .j2p' V
222
223
r"
(116)
0= (p',s'IO"Mxllp,s) = -iq"(p',s'lj"(x)lp,s).
( 11.7)
r" u,(p) ~ O.
( 11.8)
Since this condition has to hold for arbitrary va.lues of p and p', we
conclude that
( 11.10)
Thus the most general parametrization consistent with gauge invariance is given by
224
The objects F I1 F21 F2 and F.1 appearing in this expression are called
form factors.
Let us now discuss what these [arm factors can depend on. They
are Lorentz invariant quantities, so they can depend only on the dot
products of various 4-vectors in the problem. There are really only
two independent 4-vectors, p and p'. With these we can construct
three dot produc.ts, p2, p/2 and P . pi, The first two of these are
not variables, they just give the mass of the physical particle whose
vertex we are examining. Thus we are left with only one variable
which is Lorentz invariant. Instead of taking it to be p - pi, we can
also choose it to be q2 = (p - p')2 The form [actors appearing in
Eq. (11.11) are to be understood to be [unctions of q2
11.2
11.2.1
To take the first example, let us consider the situation where p = p'
and s = s', i.e., the initial and the final slates of the fermion are the
same. The momentum trl\nsfer 4vector q vanishes in this ease, and
therefore q2 = O. One now obtains
.
ePI (0)
eP, (O)P"
EpV
(11.13)
225
V'
Jp
(11.14)
(11.15)
F ( 2)
-iq.x
eel q
2m
(' [
U,' p) (p
+ P, )"
.
"]
)
- la,wq u.(p,
(11.16)
using the Gordon identity given in Eq. (4.52). Now consider the
non-relatlvistic ca...,;e, i.e., when Ep ~ Ep ' ::::::: 71/.. The dominant contribution from the (p+p')p in the square brackets renuces to the electric
charge, which has been discussed above. So let Wi now concentrate
on the other term. In the Lagrangian, the contribution of this term
can be obtaillt..-d if we couple this term to a photon field AJ.I. The
resultant effective term is
e- iqx eF (q2)
- (jp) AP = 2mV
~rn u,.(p')ia,,"q"u.,(p)A"(q). (11.17)
In the convention that qu is positive, the photon is being created at
the vertex, so in the Fourier expansion for the phot.on field, it is the
226
A~ term, Le., the term containing the factor eiq,x, which is relevant
F$J.v
would read
(11.18)
Noting the antisymmetry of UfLlh we can thus rewrite the expression
of Eq. (11.17) in the following form:
. )A~
- (JIJ.
= -
TrI.
At this point, it is instructive to look at the Dirac-Pauli representation of the ')'-matriccs to gain further insight. In the non-relativistic
limit, the solution of the lL-spillors given in Eq. (4.61) have negligible
lower components, and upper components that are jUtit Xs defined in
Eq. (4.60). In other words, in this representatiun we can write
u,(p) = J2m (
~' )
+ small
terms,
(11.20)
= 'iik
( O'Ok
~k)
(11.21)
whereas aOi's have a zero in the upper-lp.ft corner. Putting this into
Eq. (11.19), we ubtain the dominant contribution tu the matrix element to be
e-'' X eF,(q') t k
i'
- V
4m X"O' X'<'ikF l(q).
(11.22)
Looking back at the tensor F~" in Eq. (8.6), we can see that
'iikFii(q) = 2BdQ), so that the last expres.ion can be written as
(11.23)
using the fact that ok B k
= -OkBk = -a' B.
227
Since we do not know the explicit form of the form factor F1(q'),
it is impossible to tell how this interaction should look like in the
co-ordinate space. However, let us expand F I (q') in a Taylor series
around q' = O. Then the first term is a constant, and at least for this
term it is easy to find the inverse Fourier transform of the expression
in Eq. (11.23). In fact, inverse Fourier transform would be the matrix
element of the operator
(11.24)
between X~, and x., where now B is the magnetic field in co-ordinate
space. Once again, remember that this calculation is done within a
volume V. For the total Lagrangian, we need to multiply by V,
assuming a constant B-field. The corresponding term in the total
Hamiltonian will differ by a sign, i.e., will be
eQ
2m
--uB.
(11.25)
eQ
2m
eQ
m
-00 = -S,
(11.26)
where S = 100 is the spin vector for the particle. We have put a
subscript D on the magnetic moment since this contribution to the
magnetic moment, coming from the charge form factor, is usually
called the Dirac magnetic moment.
Usually, the magnetic moment is expressed in terlTlS of the Lande
g-factor, which is defined by
eQ
j.L=-? gS,
.m
(11.27)
(11.28)
228
11.2.2
Let us now move 011 to the interpretation of the form factor F2 . The
task is easy here, since this term looks exactly like the term we had
been discussing so far, Going through the same steps, we can now
conclude that there is another contribution to the magnetic moment
comi ng from the form factor F2 . This is called the anomalous magne.tic moment, which we will denote by J-LA- It is given by
(11.29)
For a particle with a charge eQ, the Lande g-factor is thus obtained by summing the two contributions:
(11.30)
But the interesting point is that even if a particle does not have a
charge, there is no fundamental reason why it cannot have a non-zero
value of the form factor F2. Thus even uncharged particles may have
magnetic moments. For such particles, of course, the entire magnetic
moment is anomalous.
11.2.3
The analysis of this form factor is very tiimilar to that of the form
factor F2. The only difference is that there is HOW an extra 1'5. Thus
when we go to the Dirac-Pauli representation. we now will have to ask
which of the matrices a J,w"Y5 have non-zero entries in the upper-left
corner. These are
(11.31)
So now, instead of the components ptj of the field tensor, we have the
components pOi which give the dominant contrihution. And these
are the "Components of the electric field. Thus instead of B in the
effective interaction, we now will have E. The interaction is therefore
that of an electric dipole interacting with the electric field, and the
dipole moment is given hy
(11.32)
11.2.
229
The form factor F2(q2) is therefore called the electric dipole form
factor. Just like the anomalous magnetic moment, this can be nonzero even for an uncharged particle.
11.2.4
Anapole moment F3
Using the momentum-space version of the electromagnetic field equation given in Eq. (8.8), we find the contrihution of this term to the
- jP A p term in the Lagrangian to be
(11.36)
which is obtained after multiplying the Lagrangian (density) by the
volume V. This is thus an interaction of the spin of the particle with
the current density, something which was a.bsent in classical physics.
The quantity F3 (0) is given a name in analogy with the multipole
moments - it is called the anapole moment.
We have used concepts from classical physics in interpreting these
form factors. It should be remembered however that classically,
dipole moments can exist only for extended charge distributions. A
point particle in classical physics can have only the total charge,
which of course does not depend on the momentum transfer q. Every other form factor, as well as the momentum dependence of all of
them, is a ha.lImark of quantum physics.
230
o Exercise 11.3 Using the genera.lJonn of the electroma.tJnetic V1't.e:t oj n complez scolnr jield dejined in Ez. 11.1 (p 224), jind the
relntion betwe", F(O) nnd the chnrge oj the pnrticle.
11.3
p'
+k
_.2/
~ -..
d'k
-y~('" + + mh~(" + + mh~ (11 38)
(27f)' [(P' + k)2 - m 2 J I(p + k}2 - m 2 J k 2 .
.
231
This is the first time in this book that we are trying to evaluate the
amplitude of a loop diagram. Therefore IH us discuss some general
techniques which will be useful for evaluation of any loop diagram.
One of these is the introduction of Feynman pa.rameters.
For this we need the identity
_1_ =
a, a2
in
(11.39)
2'
(11.40)
More generally, for any number of factors on the left, we can write
--=-- (n - 1)' fol de, fo' d(2' . . fo' d(" 0(1["''' L '-II"'
n
ala2 .. . an
()
L...i=l (jai
(11.41)
The parameters (i are called Feynman parameters. We now demonstrate their use.
D Exercise 11.4 Prove Eq. (11.41).
For the integral in Eq. (11.38), we have three factors in the d<>nominator, so we should use Eq. (11.41) with n = 3 to write
N,.(k)
[(pi + k)2 - m 2) [(p + k)2 _ m 2] k 2
r'
= 2 in d(]
(, - (2 - (3)
N (k)
~3 '
(11.42)
232
+ 2k (IP' + (2P)
+ k)2
- m 2 J + (3k2
(11.43)
(11.45)
so that the integral of Eq. (11.38) can be rewritten in the form
(11.46) .
This shows the first advantage of using the Fcynman parameters.
The denominator is now an even function of the new momentum
variable k'. Thus terms in the numerator which are odd in k' will
vanish on integration. Moreover, for the remaining terms, the integration over k' can be done very easily, as we will see shortly.
Let us first look at the numerator. Since k' is a dummy variable,
the final result will not depend on it. So let us write it simply as k,
because the old variable k will never be llsed again. Integration over
the Feynman parameter (3 gives us the step function, so we obtain
(11.47)
233
(11.49)
N~
-Y"h~~-Y" + -Y"I!-Y~h"
+m-y" (I!-y~
(11.50)
234
where the dots, for the rest of this section, stand for any term which
we know do not contain any contribution to the anomalous magnetic
moment.
(11.54)
= (1 - (, - (2)P'
+ (1 -
(2)1f
= (1 - (1 - (2)m
+ (1 -
(2)'
(11.55)
As we already said, the last step does not follow in general, but is
valid when the entire expression has the u(p') to the left. Similarly,
we can write
(11.56)
In the combination hp~ which appears in Eq. (11.52), we now obtain
four terms. Among these, the term containing both factors of m
from the expressions for ~ and ~ contains only a "(p, and therefore
235
contributes only to the form factor F" Then there is another term
which contains ;'Yp;, which also does not contribute to F,. We are
thus left with the terms with one factor of m and one factor of ,.
Again interchanging (1 and (, in one of these terms, we can write
-2hp~ =
Adding the two contributions from Eqs. (11.54) and (11.57), we can
extract the general expression for F,(q'). For the anomalous magnetic moment, we need just F2(O), which is
where we have used the step function to adjust the limits of the (2
integration.
I.(A)
d4k
(11.59)
236
for certain values of k Z . Since A Z is real, if we did not have the little
imaginary part in the denominator, these poles would have been on
the real axis, and would pose problems while we tried to perform the
integration. This predicament was discussed while we found out the
propagators for various fields in earlier chapters of this book.
lmko
-r-~---t---I-':::0-'--
Re ko
Figure 11.2: The contour for performing tne ko integration is shown withthick lines. The crosses indicate the poles of the integrand.
Once we have the imaginary part, the poles are not on the real
axis and we have no problem. Suppose first we are trying to integrate
over ko. The denominator in this case can be written as
B 2 + iE,
where B Z = k Z + A 2 If we consider complex values of ko, the poles
are at B - it and - B + it, as shown by the little crosses in Fig. 11.2.
We have been careless about the factors going with the t term in
the denominator. This is because c is a very small parameter \ which
should be taken to zero at the end of the calculation anyway. The
only thing to remember is that it has to be taken to ~ero from the
positive side. Thus, we have to be careful that the quantity which
may multiply E is positive, and we have been c.areful about that.
In any easel let us turn to the integration over ko. Imagine that
we are performing it for the integrand which appears in Eq. (11.59),
but over the contour in the complex kowplallc. The contour we have
k5 -
237
+00 dkn(k2
-00
0 -
B2
.).
+ If
1~;00
.
+'00
dko(k'_B2
0
. ). =0. (11.60)
+ 1.
B2 + t
.).=i
]+00 dknE (
-00
1
-
k2DE
B2 + 1
.). (11.61)
.J
I. (A) = ,
d kE
(211") 4
(1l.62)
-+---'i',leo. ,
'[----,k:O.l---,-----,A"""2
where now
(11.63)
kl
Chapter 11.
238
We now put the result of the momentum integration into Eq. (11.58).
Since A' = (, + (.)'rn' in our case, we obtain
(11.65)
Plugging this back into Eq. (11.30) and remembering that the charge
of the electron is -e, i.e., Q = -1 for the electron, we obtain the
Lande g-factor to be
0<
(11.67)
g=2+-.
"
The second term is the anomalous contribution of the g-factor, which
was first calculated by Schwinger. Of course there are further corrections to the g-factor, which comes from higher order diagrams, and
they contain higher powers of 0<.
Calculation of the anomalous magnetic moment of the electron'
has been one of the greatest triumphs of QED. To date, the calculations have been done up to the order n'. The results give the
theoretical prediction to be
~(g -
2) = 1159652460(127)(75)
10- 1.
(11.68)
The uncertainties for the last digits are shown in parentheses - the
first one due to the experimental uncertainty in 0< and the second
one due to computational limitations. The experimentally measured
value for this quantity is
~(g -
2) = 1159652193(10) x 10- 1.
(11.69)
Thus we see that the two agree up to seven significant digits! The
anomalous moment of the muon agrees with experiment up to eight
significant digits.
11.4.
11.4
239
Since QED is parity invariant, the only other form factor that appears
in pure QED interactions is the charge form factor Fl. Let us now
consider the contributions to Fl' These are terms in Eq. (11.50)
which are proportions.! to "/~. The last term reduces to the expression
of Eq. (11.51) and so contributes only to Fl. The contribution of the
third term can be read from Eq. (11.54), and it is 8m 2(1- (I - (2l"1...
As for the second term, i.e., the term -2h~~, we have indicated
which terms do not contribute to F2. These can now be assembled:
-2h~~ = -2m 2(1 - (I - (2)21'"
+ 2(1
- (!l(1 - (2);"/,,;
+ ... ,
(11.70)
where in this section, the dots mean the terms which are irrelevant
for Fl. Using the anticommutation relation of the l'-matrices, we can
write ;'I"i = (2q" - 'I"i); = 2q,,; - l'"q2. Of these, the first term
vanishes between the two spinors, and the second term contributes
to Fl' Thus we can write
2q2(1
- (1)(1 - (2l"1"
+ ....
(11.71)
We now have to discuss the first term in Eq. (11.50). This can
be written as
using the contraction formula from Eq. (4.42). Thus for this term
the integration over k has the following generic form:
(11.73)
where f(k 2 ) is some function of k 2 . The integrs.! must be symmetric
in the indices v and p and obviously cannot depend on the 4-vector
k which has been integrated over. Thus it must be proportions.! to
the metric tensor glJP and we can write
I
[VP = g"P J.
(11. 74)
240
Contracting both sides of this equation with 9vp and using the fact
that 9vp9 vP = 4, we obtain
(11.75)
using the definition of I"P from Eq. (11.73). Thus we can write
(II. 76)
a result which is extremely useful for performing loop integrations.
a
Exercise n.5 Verih Eq. (11.76) expli<itly by <hanging integration uariabtes 8uitabt'Y. For this, first check that the integral on the
lejt sh.ould \Janish if v I- p. Then, bll change oj llnriabtes, ShOUl that
(11. 77)
for any i = 1,2,3. FinaU-y. add these jour equal objects and diuide
by 4 to obtain Eq. (11.76).
j d'kkvkVk'kPj(k') =
2.
(9""9'P+ 9"'9
24
x
vP
+9"P 9 "')
j d'k k'f(k').
(11.78)
(11.79)
using the contraction formula from Eq. (4.42). Thus this term also
contributes only to the charge form factor, as was claimed in 11.3.
Collecting all the terms, we now find that the contribution to
Fl(q2~coming from the diagram of Fig. 11.1 is:
241
where
+ (2)2
- 2(1 - (I - (2)] .
(11.81)
Notice that there is a term in N , which is just k 2 Consider the
momentum integration for this term. Apart from an overall factor
and the integrations over the Feynman pa.rameters , we ohtain an
expression of the form
(11.82)
This is a function of q2 Consider now the contribution to this integral coming from large values of k 2 , i.e., for 1,,21 > M 2 , where M is
a mass scale much larger than both m and Jjq1j. For this part, we
can neglect m 2 and q2 and write this part a.,;
d'k
J1k21>M2 k 4
(11.83)
11.5
Electron-proton scattering
posed of quarks. Thus, protons are not simple Dirac particles. The
only way to write down the electromagnetic vertex involving them is
to use form factors.
To be more specific, let us look at Fig. 11.3, which gives the
lowest order diagram for the scattering. The Feynman amplitude
242
k'
A(q)
p
can be written as
[U(P) (p') (-ier
V
)
U(p) (p)]
(11.B4)
(11.86)
243
Tr [f'Y"h V ]
f~V =
= 4 [k'"k
+ k~k'v + ~'J'g"v]
(11.89)
and
(11.90)
Using the form for
The final result is
r"
7'J"'Jv) + W,
m~
( PJ.l
P . q )]
- ----qr-qv
(11.91)
where
(11.92)
The calculation of the differential cross section is now straightforward. In the Lab frame where the initial proton is at rest, it comes
out to be
. ,0
2W, sm :2
do
+ W'COS
,0
:2
. OJ
0
[1 + (2E/rn p ) sin':2 sin':2
dO
'
(11.93)
+p ~
e-
+X,
(11.94)
244
(11.95)
In addition, Wf'&/ ca.n depend only on the vectors k and p, or equivalently on q and p. The most general tensor constructed from two
vectors and satisfying Eq. (11.95) has the form
AP]
W
+2m~pVAPP
q
(11.96)
8pin~O
~iuen
'in
E~.
do
d!l
F2 cos 2 ~
42
0] 0.
[1+ (2E/m.) sin' 2 sin' 2
(11.97)
Chapter 12
Renormalization
In calculating various amplitudes, we have
two kinds
of divergences. In 9.10, we found an infra-red divergence, i.e., an
amplitude which becomes infinite for vanishingly sillall values of some
momentum. On the other hand, in 11.4 we J;;'lW an example of
ultra-violet divergence, which is caused hy arbitrarily large values of
momenta in a loop integration. In this chapter, we take up the issue
of how these infinities ca.n be interpreted. As a paradig-m, we will
often use QED as the interacting theory. bllt SOffle of the general
arguments will be valid for any field theory.
Our primary concern will be the eliminat.ioll of the ultra-violet
divergences. In fact, unless otherwise specified, ';divergcnc.e" will
mean ult.ra-violet divergence in this chaptPr. \Ve will see that the
structure needed to interpret ultra-violet div('rg(~llces will also allow
the cancellation of infra-red divergence::;.
CIlCOUlIlcred
12.1
12.1.1
Let us find out which diagrams arc divergl'IlL i.(~.! make infinite contributions to the amplitllCie. As we already saw in ~fl1.3, the infinities
ill an amplitude come from momentum integrat.ioll.
So let u::; consider a generic. diagram wit.h f loops. ill which the
number of internal fermion lines is Ttf and tht: 1l111!lhcr of internal
boson lines is nb. Let us also say tlJat ill this g{'lleric. diagram there
are different kinds of vertices and the i-til kinel apr~a.rs Vi times.
245
246
D = 4e - 2nb - n I
+ L Vi d; .
(12.1 )
247
EI
+ 2n l
= Lviii,
(12.3)
because each internal line must connect two vertices and each exter-
~EI + LVi
(d' +b, + ~f; -4)
,
e,
(12.4)
The quantity multiplying Vi in the last term has a simple interpretation. The mass dimension of the field operators, including the
derivatives, at any vertex of the i-th type is di + b; + ~ /;, and thus
the coupling constant associated with this interaction must have mass
dimension
Oi = 4 - d i - bi -
21, .
(12.5)
248
D = 4-E,,- ;;E,-2EA
+ LlJ,(a,
-0;),
(12.7)
wh.ere E and E A are the. number of eJ:teMtal f\calar and 'Vector lines,
is th.e number of uector boson lines at n tlcrte:t of the ith. t"pe,
and all other 81lmbols hnue the meaning yiuen in the text. Prom thi.s,
argue that the thwry would not be power-counting renorrna.lha.bte.
Qj
12.1.2
.,
,,
249
"
"
(a)
Figure 12.1:
(b)
divergent subdiagram.
250
12.2
The coupling constant associated with this interaction is dimensionless. Therefore, 8 = O. The formula for the superficial degree of
divergence is given simply by
(12.9)
vergence:
Eb
0
2
1
Ef
2
0
2
0
D
1
2
0
0
(12.10)
251
Of these, the last one is not really divergent. The reason is the gauge
invariance of QED, which demands that if all external lines of a diar
gram are photon lines, the amplitude should vanish when contracted
with the momentum of any of those lines. We will illustrate later
that this implies that the amplitude of a diagram with n external
photon lines must contain at least n powers of external momenta.
Thus for the amplitude with four external photons, the real degree
of divergence cannot be larger than -4. Hence this amplitude must
be convergent. For the amplitude with two external photon lines, we
can also say that there must be at least two external momenta, but
this reduces the degree of divergence from 2 to zero, and therefore
the amplitude can still be divergent. Thus we have found that there
are three kinds of amplitude which can be divergent in QED, viz.,
those corresponding to the first three rows of the table in Eq. (12.10).
(A)
(B)
(C)
252
12.3
The infinite amplitudes are tackled in two steps. In the first step, the
goal is to somehow perform the loop integrations and write it in a
closed form by introducing; some extra parameter in the theory. The
parameter is introduced in a way that the integrals call be performed
for a range of its values. However l if we were to take the values
appropriate for the physica.l limit, the result would b~ infinite. This
part of the process is c.alled 1-egularization.
There are many ways ill which regularization can be performed.
For example, we c.an c.hoose to integrate all loop momenta up to a
certain maximum value of A. Then we call perform the integrations
and would obtain results which depend on A. This procedure is
called a cut-off regularization. Alternatively. we can use sontc auxiliary fields which do not actually appear in the physical theory. These
are introduced in slich it way that the infinities occurring from physical particles in the loop arc canceled by the infinities arising from
these auxiliary particle::, in the loop. The integrations can then be
performed allu the results depend on the lTl~ses of these auxiliary
particles. The infinities reappear in the limit when the masses of
these auxiliary pnrtic1cs are set to infinity. This procedure is called
Pauli- Villm.s H~gulaT'izlLf.ion. A thirrl procedure is to formally make.
the nilmhcr of space-time dimensions an arbitrary real number. The
results of integratiolls now would depend on this number. When it is
set equal to four, the infinities show up. This process is called the dimensional regularization. In all cases, the parameter dependent part
whic} becomes infinite in the physical limit is called the divergent
part of the amplitude.
Once we have rcgulari:;;ed a. divergent integral to a parameter
dependent finite number, we can introducc' what arc called CDuntertenns into the Lagrangian. These are products of the fields, with
coefficients chosen such that the divcrgcllt part of each regularized
amplitude is canceled by the contribution from the corresponding
COllntertenn. This procedure is called Tenormalization. If all the
CDuntcrtcrms are of the same form as some or all of the terms present
253
12.4
Ward-Takahashi identity
P _q) --
Q1 J
(12.11)
(12.12)
This relation turns out to be valid at all orders in perturbation
theory. In other words, we can write
(12.13)
254
ll:h~.11.
... :..._.--
;)1
.. ,:::
';.,'
......
---+
--.'--
(12.14)
i.
:"
Sp'(p) =]I-m-E(p).
(12.15)
l~
; I '
"
.' ,
",
Fi~ure
.C\.
12.3:.
'.
QED .
(12.16)
12.4.
255
q f
(1) _ ( .
P
-zeQ)
J
Q
d k
(27l")'Y~ tJ
i"
+ _ m
"
p + _ m "Ip ,D
~p( )
k.
(12.18)
Since p' = p - q, we can write
Ii as (p + - m) - (p' + -
m). Thus,
(12.19)
Putting this back into Eq. (12.18) and comparing with the expression
for the self-energy in Eq. (12.16), we obtain
(12.20)
Adding this to the tree level relation gives Eq. (12.13) up to I-loop
contributions.
It is true that our proof takes only the I-loop contribution into
account and considers only the fermionpllOtoll interaction. But one
can construct a more general proof from Cllrrent conservation, In
fact the identity holds true to all orders, even jf the fermion has other
interactions which do not violate gauge illvariancc. Also, we know
from Eq. (11.8) that qPfp must vanish between thespinors. However,
if we consider the effective electromagnetic vertex of a neutral fermion
[or which Q = 0, we see from Eq. (12.13) that. for neut.ral fermions a
more stringent. relation, qJJT J1. = 0, is satisfied irrespective of whether
we consider it between spinors or not. Thes" facts are very useful in
considering electromagnetic interactions of partic1('~ in the presence
of other int.eractions a.<; well.
256
a Exercise 12.2
12.5
12.5.1
Fermion self-energy
Let us start with the fermion self-energy in QED. We will take the
fermion to be the electron, with Q = -1. The expression for the
fermion self-energy can be written from Eq. (12.16) as
J
J
E(p) = -ie 2
. 2
= ,e
(12.21)
In the last slep, we have used the conwu:tion formulas for the 1'matrices, Eq. (4.42).
We can now use the Feynman parameters for the denominator,
= ie 2
= ie 2
io
d(
J
J
2(p
d'k
r d(
l
io
-711 2 }
4m
2(p + iI) - 4m
2' (12.22)
+ 2(k . p + ((1'" - m 2)]
integration variahle k = k + (1', so that we
d'k
(271")' [k 2
+ iI) -
d'k
(271")
()p + 271 - 4m
2 . (12.23)
+ ((1 _ ()p2 _ (m2]
, .2(1 -
[k'
r d Jd k
(1 - 0
io ( (21f)4Ik2 + (1 _ ()p2 _ (m2f '
2 r
Jd k
1
-4mie in d( (21f)4 [k2 + ((1 _ Op2 _ (m
2' 2
a p ) = ,e
( 2
b(p2) =
257
2J2 .
(12.25)
the a-matrices. Thus we are left with the unit matrix and tbe ~'s
only. With the "IP'S, the Lorentz covariant combination will be "IPpp,
or p, which can appear with a co-efficient a, and the unit matrix can
appear with a co-efficient b. Both these co-efficients must be Lorentz
invariant, and can therefore depend only on p2. This leads us to the
form of Eq. (12.24).
12.5.2
Vacuum polarization
(12.26)
258
f (~~4
+ P, p)
i5p(k
+ p) J.
(12.27)
If we contract the left hand side of this equation by k" and use the
Ward-Takahashi identity of Eq. (12.13), we obtain
There are two terms here. In the second one, we can shift the loop
integration variable from p to k + p, so that the two terms cancel
each other and we obtain
( 12.29)
Similarly, starting from the diagrammatic identity
(12.30)
259
'\
/
most general form for the vacuum polarization tensor will be given
by
(12.32)
where IT(k 2 ) is a Lorentz invariant object. and must therefore be
a function only of k 2 . Eq. (12.32) viudic~tes the comment made
carlier because the amplitude of the 2-poiut function with external
photon hnes is proportional to at least two powers of the external
momentum.
o Exercise 12.3 Find the tensor slruct.uff' for the effective .It-ph.oton
vertex 7r 11I .\f.{ k 1 , k 2 , k;\. k 4 ). Assume. JlQ.rity in.1JtLrinnce, and use rela.tiona like k\'1f/-,v>,p = 0, and the indisttllgui:'lhubility oj ph.clons which
implies lha.t the intnchange between all.J.I t.wo photons should nol
change the l.lertex. Do not a8aUffie. thf' photons to be on~hdl.
12.5.3
Vertex function
260
12.6
12.6.1
.. ~~
.... k
p
QED.
As we mentioned in 12.3, we must introduce a regularization
parameter in the theory in order to perform the integrals. We also
mentioned some of the pos::;ibilitics for the rq~l1larization parameter.
In this section, let us use dimensional regularization. This means
that all the integrals should be performed assuming the number of
space-time dimensions to be an arbitrary real number N. We will
also assume that the fermion in the loop is electron} so that its charge
is -e.
Calculating in N dimensions poses a problem. The Lagrangian
must now have mass dimension N. Using the Dirac Lagrangian, we
find that the mass dimension of a fermion Held is Iv'>J = (N - 1)/2.
Similarly, from the Maxwell Lagrangian we find that [A~] = N/2-1.
Since the interaction term must also have mass dimension N, the
coupling constant of the interaction term seems to have a non-zero
mass dimension. We can take ca.re of this by introducing an arbitrary
constant mass J-l and writing the interaction term as
2l",
= eJ.l'
v'>ltv'>
(12.33)
(12.34)
261
"'~v(k) = -
dNp
[.,
i(p+m}.
i(p+;!+m)]
+ k)2 _ m 2
'
(12.35)
where the minus sign in front of the integra! sign comes because of
the closed fermion loop. Also, we now have eJl' instead of e at each
vertex. This gives
where
(12.38)
Let us now look at the trace in the numerator. At this point, the
denominator is already even in the integration variable p, so we need
only to keep the even terms in the numerator. Thus the numerator,
which we will call Nj.lJll can be written as
262
(12.40)
where dN = 4 when N = 4. Once this is assumed, we can find the
trace of a string of four ,,-matrices in the way described in Eq. (A.20)
of tbe Appendix, and obtain
(12.41)
Applying it to the present case, we get
N~"
= dN
+ a2)]
(12.42)
N~"
= 2dN(1 -
1) p2 + a2] .
(12.43)
(12.45)
263
-i
r'
(4,,)N/2f(~N)f(2) Jo
d(
[(2
)f(I+~N)f(1-~N)
N - 1
(a2)' N/2
- a
2f(~N)f(2 - ~N)]
. (12.46)
(a 2)2-N/2
Using now the property f(1 + z) = zf(z) which is valid ror any z,
we can write it as
-i
(4,,)N/2
/01 d(
0
-:-(a02)"11_N
"/M2
[~ (~
- 1) r(1 -
~N) -
f(2 -
~N)]
(12.47)
But the first term inside the square brackets is (1- ~N)r(I- ~N) =
f(2 - ~N). So the integral vanishes.
Actually, this was only expected. From the general grounds of
gauge invariance, we have already argued in 12.5 that the tensor
structure or ,,"V should be given by Eq. (12.32). And in writing the 1loop expression ror the numerator N"v in Eq. (12.43), we have already
separated out the terms which correspond to thi::; tensor structure.
The remaining tenns must then vanish, which is what we have shown
explicitly. We can think of this as a cross-check on our implicit
belier that our procedure of regularization oo,'s not o,,,,troy the gauge
invariance of QED. We now go back to the expression in Eq. (12.43)
and put it in the rormula obtained in Eq. (12.37) to write
Np
2 kklJd
d
22'(
k
(k)
""V = 2, Ne I' 9"v - - "-V (2)N
"
/o
fI
d( 1-()2
jp2 - a 2 J
(12.48)
r'
_ 2dNe 21'2'
2
f(E)
1r,w(k) - - (41r)N/2 (9"v k - k"k v ) Jo d( ((I - () (a 2)' (12.49)
We can now see why the result diverges for N = 4. For small e,
1
f(e) = - - 'IE
E
+ O(e),
(12.50)
264
foOD dx e-% In x =
0.57721 ... ,
(12.51)
and the symbol 0() in Eq. (12.50) represent terms which have at
least one power of , and therefore vanish for = O. Using this
expansion of the r-function with d N = 4, we can write the dimensiondependent terms of Eq. (12.49) in the form:
1'-2<2 rt)
41r
(a
41r
)-< =
=
_1
41r 2
0()]
"IE
41r1'-2
0()
"IE]
= _1_
"IE
41rI,2
0().
(12.52)
Putting this back in Eq. (12.49) and using a = e 2/41r, we can now
write
(12.53)
where we have used the shorthands
(12.54)
reinstating the definition of a 2 from Eq. (12.38), and
1
'
- = - - "IE
+ In(41r).
(12.55)
n(k 2 )
= _ 2a
7r
[_1 _ ](k 2 )]
6'
[1
a - - In
= -3rr ['
= n(O)
(m
-
/.12
..
2 + ... ]
+ (fimte)k
+ k2 n'(0) +... .
(12.56)
265
N~dimen.sion8,
"I' -y"
"In""I'
12.6.2
= N = 4 - 2 ,
= (-2
+ 2)"(".
(12.57)
For the vacuum polarization diagram, we used the dimensional regularization. We could use the same technique here. However, to give
some idea of different regularization techniques, let us employ the
Pauli-Villars regularization for this case. In this method, we introd uce some extra particle in the theory whose mass is very heavy, to
be denoted by M. This is the regularization parameter, with the
physical limit corresponding to M ~ 00. We suppose that there is
an extra diagram where this heavy particle can replace the photon.
Also, the couplings of this heavy particle is such that the sign of this
extra contribution is opposite to that of the photon diagram. Effectively this means that the denominator of the photon propagator
should be modified. Instead of just k 2 , we should now have
(12.58)
Therefore, instead of Eq. (12.21), we should now write
.2
2/
,e M
(2,,)4 P(k2 _ M2)[(p + k)2 _ m2j .
4
d k
E(p) =
-2(p+~)+4m
(12.59)
266
= 2!
d(2
d(J J(k)o(1 -
~J -
(2 - (J) .(12.60)
Here
(12.61)
with
c2 =
(12.62)
and we have used (J = 1- (I - (2. Putting this back into Eq. (12:59)
and changing the integration variable from k to k+(tp, we can write
l
H ,
. 2
2
~k
-2(1 - (!l]l + 4m
E(p) = 2.. M
(2".)4 1 d(, 1
d(2
(k2 _ C 2 )J
.
(12.63)
The parameter (J has been integrated over, and the resulting 8function has been used to change the limits of integration.
The momentum integration is now convergent, and we can eval-
r'
oM
a = - 2;;- 1 d(, (1 - (!lJ,) ,
0
b = oM m
".
where
J,) =
'-(,
10o
10' d(,
0
J,) ,
(12.64)
1
d(2
(1m2
+ (2M2
- (,(I - (,)p2
(12.65)
) 2]
'" _1 In [
M2
(1 - (!lM
]
(,m 2 - (,(I - (,)p2 .
(12.66)
12.7. Counterterms
267
In the last step, we have used the fact that M' is much larger than
all the other mass or momentum scales in the problem. Putting this
back in Eq. (12.64) and writing ( for (I, we obtain
r
[(m'(1-_(1()M'
_ ()P']
J d( (1 - () In
l
a
a = 2"
b = _ am
"
~, In [(m' - (1 - ()P
Jor' ....
(1 _ ()M2
2
] .
(12.67)
We see that the self-energy E(p) depends on the regularization parameter M through a and b.
o Exercise 12.5
a =
[ __
I
211'"
b= _
2t:'
~
1r
Jo
J1.2
[_
}] .
(;,
Jl2
12.7
Counterterms
12.7.1
.sf = -4F~vF~v
+ 1/J
(i"ta~
- m) 1/, + e1/J'Y~1/,A~,
(12.69)
= -
(.q~vk' - k"kv) ,
(12.70)
268
+ ~
(12.71)
(12.72)
where we have used Eq. (6.56). In other words, k.JfeK has a contribution from i-loop diagrams which is O(h l ).
Therefore, when we talk about loop amplitudes, we are in fact
talking about terms of higher order in h which vanish as h ~ O. The
full 'quantum' Lagrangian is therefore of the form
(12.73)
where o->f(n) will affect the results at n-Ioop order. For example,
when we calculated the propagator to 1.100p order in Eq. (12.71),
269
we ought to have included some unspecified 02'(1) in Eq. (12.69).
Let us include such a term, and add its contribution to the result
of Eq. (12.71). This will give the full amplitude at order h. Let us
denote the contribution of 02'(1) diagrammatically by a cross on the
photon line. All we know about 02'(1) is that M2'(I) vanishes as
h ~ O. Other than that we are free to choose its form to be whatever
is convenient for us. Let us suppose its contribution is given by
(12.74)
If we now include this contribution, the total contribution to the
2-photon amplitude up to order" is given by
= -
(g~"k2 - k~k")
x {1-
d( (1-()ln (1-((1-()
~:) }.
(12.75)
There are two things to note here. First, the dependence on the
regularization parameter has vanished. For this reason, this new
term is called a counterterm, i.e., something which counters the dependence of a divergent amplitude on the regularization parameter.
Second, for a physical photon, k 2 = 0, the logarithm term in the integrand vanishes, so that the contribution for the 2-photon amplitude
is exactly what we obtained from the tree diagram. These are the two
criteria which led us to choose the precise form of the counterterm
contribution of Eq. (12.74). Formally, we define the renormalized
vacuum polarization through
(12.76)
and fix
270
~ !!...
4 3".
(2.
'
-1 m
n Jl2
~v
F~v
(12.79)
This, of course, is the proper form for the counterterm only at the
order n. If more complicated diagrams for vacuum polarization are
discussed, including terms of higher order in n, the precise form
for the counterterm Lagrangian will be different. However, since the
divergent contributions to 7rJJV always have the same tensor structure
as in Eq. (12.32), the counterterm will in general be of the form
.st;}P = - ~
(Z3 -
I)F~vF~V ,
(12.80)
(1
12.7.2
- - In -m
'
Jl2
Z3 = 1 - -n
3".
(12.81)
which goes like p, and there is another one which goes like the unit
matrix. Thus, the divergences in these can be canceled by a counterterm Lagrangian of the form
(12.82)
for some Z2 and Jm. We want this term to counter the divergences
coming from fermion self-energy. The total inverse propagator would
now be
p- m
ER(P) ,
(12.83)
where ER(P) is the sum of the divergent loop contributions and the
counterterms l
(12.84)
Comparing this equation with Eq. (12.82), we see that Z2 -I = -aCT
and (Z2 - I)(m - Jm) = bCT.
12.7. Counterterms
271
(12.85)
This gives
aCT = -a(m 2) - 2m 2a'(m 2 ) - 2mb'(m 2 ) ,
bCT = _b(m 2) + 2m 3a'(m 2) + 2m 2b'(m 2) ,
(12.86)
where a', b' are derivatives with respect to p2. After some algebra,
we get
aCT
= - 2:
bCT =
If we now substitute a(p2), b(p2) from Eq. (12.67) and aCT, bCT
from Eq. (12.87), we find that En is independent of the regularization parameter M. Since the M ~ 00 limit gives the ultra-violet
divergences, we can say that after adding tILe countertenns, the ultraviolet divergence has vanished in the 2-point. function of Eq. (12.83).
This is not to say that Eq. (12.87) is free from divergences altogether. It involves the integral J~ d(/(, which clearly diverges at the
lower limit. This divergence c"n be traced hack to Eq. (12.23). Near
( = 0, the momentum integral is J d 4 k/k 4 , which diverges at both
the infra-red and ultra-violet regions. The COllnterterm has removed
the ultra-violet divergence, but the infra-red divergence remains. We
will show in 12.9.3 that this infra-red divergeu"e cancels in physical
amplitudes.
The on-shell criterion for choosing our counter terms guarantees
that divergent decorations of the extern,,1 (on-shell) lines in a IPR
diagram can be safely ignored, because they cancel with the COUI1terterm.
o Exercise 12.6
Supvl~
272
12.7.3
Vertex function
The remaining divergence is in the vertex amplitude. It can be canceled by a counterterm of the form
for some Z!. Notice that although the vertex can have anomalous
magnetic moment kind of terms, those terms are not divergent, so
one does not need any counterterm for them.
The counterterms are related by the Ward-Takahashi identity
derived in 12.4. To show this, let us ""rite the vertex function for
the electron as
(12.89)
where A~(p, p') is the loop contribution. Taking an infinitesimal q in
Eq. (12.13), we can write the identity in the form
A~(p,p) = -
8E(p)
8~
(12.90)
which is the original form in which the identity was derived by Ward.
In principle, we can introduce counterterms so that this relation is
violated at higher loops. But suppose we design the renormalization prescriptions in such a way that Eq. (12.90) is obeyed for the
corresponding counterterms as well. From Eq. (12.82), we see that
(12.91)
so that
8EcT
8~
= (Z2 - Ih~
(12.92)
A;;r = (ZI -
Ih~,
(12.93)
273
so that we obtain
(12.94)
12.8
Full Lagrangian
where
mB = m - (1- Zi')6m.
(12.96)
Ai; =
v% A~,
. 1/IB =
v% 1/1.
(12.97)
What we find is that in terms of these new fields, the full or bare
Lagrangian can be written in the form
'zB =
mB) 1/IB
+ eB1/IB'Y~1/IBAi;,
(12.98)
where
eB =
Z\
Z,v'Z3
e.
(12.99)
274
(a).
D"
= 8" -
(12.100)
D1 ) D".
275
we have qlJantized the theory by adding gauge fixing terms, all other
terms obey the gauge symmetry even in the full quantum theory.
We have gone through the procedure for the specific theory
of QED. But the general philosophy gives some insight into all
field theories. For example, we understand why theories in which
some coupling con~tants have negative ma.'SS dimensions are nonrenormalizablc, a. statement that we made earlier. As we discussed,
in such theories, infinite number of amplitudes become divergent.
Thus, to tame these divergences, we would need an infinite number
of counterterms. But the original Lagrangian does not have infinite
number of fields or parameters. Thus there is no way that we could
hide the infinitely many countcrterms in the definitions of fields and
parameters of the theory, and this is equivalent to the statement that
such theories are non~renormalizable.
12.9
12.9.1
276
nucleus of charge
+Ze.
+ gauge
terms.
(12.101)
This will affect the scattering of an electron off a static charge. Sel>arating this propagator into its transver.se, Coulomb and 'remainder'
(gauge-dependent) parts as in 8.7, we find that the correction corresponds to replacing the static field of the nucleus by
Ze + Zm 83 (x).
47fT
IS"m 2
(12.102)
12.9.2
Let us go back to Eq. (12.99). Since we now know that Ward identity
gives Zl = Z2, we can rewrite it as
e
eB =
(12.103)
,fZJ'
277
Suppose someone decides that the quantity e appearing in this Lagrangian is the value of the coupling constant at some specific value
of k 2 , where k is the momentum Aowing through the photon line.
For the interaction term, this person would then choose Z3 in such ~
way that the counterterm cancels the divergent contributions at that
value of k 2
As for the possible values of k 2 , we note one thing. Suppose the
two fermion lines connected with the photon line carry momenta p
and p'. Then k 2 = (p - p')2 = 2(m 2 - p . p'). If we consider it in
the rest frame of the initial particle, this gives k 2 = 2m(m - E'),
where E' is the time component of pl. Since E' > m, this quantity
is always negative. And since k 2 is a Lorentz invariant quantity, it
must be negative in every frame.
So let us say we decided that the quantity e appearing in Eq.
(12.69) is the valne of the coupling constant at k 2 = -8, where now
8 is a positive quantity. For this choice, let us write e as e(s), and the
resulting choice of Z3 will be denoted by Z3(S). Looking back at the
sum of the tree contribution and the I-loop divergent contribution
in Eq. (12.71), we now see that we should choose
(12.104)
6/
O(8)
0
= Z3(S)
= o(s) ( 1 +. 3".
[1
]) ,
(12.105)
18
runn'lng.
278
a(.) = o(s')
+ 20
[I(-s) - I(-.')J
(12.106)
"
r'
I(-s)"'Jod(I-()ln
=
((I-()S)
1'2
(12.107)
() In ((1 - ())
0:
()
s'
(12.108)
Case 2:
. m2, .' =
0:
which is
(mIl'
2
() In
(mIl'
2
= il1 ln
(12.109)
279
Therefore,
I( -s) - 1(0)
= ~ In (~2) +
=
d(
~ [In (~2) - ~]
W - () In (((1 -
())
(12.110)
Thus,
a(3) = 0(0)
+ ;;
[In
(~2) -~]
(12.111)
o Exercise 12.8
Use the mQ.8ses of tne lermions gi1Jen aboue to calcul"te a "t s = (BOGeV)'.
.
12.9.3
280
p'
(a)
tq=p'_p
+Ze
pi
(b)
+Ze
We now consider the next higher order term for the scattering
process with no photon emission, shown in Fig. 12.7. The amplitude
of these diagrams are O(e'.A'o). When we add this with the lowest
order amplitude .A'o and square it, the cross term will have the same
power of e as the square of the Bremsstrahlung amplitude. We now
show that this cross term wiJr also be infra-red divergent, and the
two divergences exactly cancel each other.
We start with Fig. 12.7a. The expression for the vertex function
is given in Eq. (11.38). For soft photons k" "" 0, so we neglect all
occurrences of k in the numerator. Simplifying the denominator with
the on-shell conditions p' = pi' = m' and putting in the if terms in
281
rfl) = ie2
d'k
'Y,,(i/ + mh~(p + mh"
(2rr)' [21'" k + if] [2p k + if] [k 2 + iEJ
JIR
+ ...
.
(12.112)
In this formula, the integral is not over all values of k, but rather only
on small values, indicated by the subscript 'rR' on the integration
sign. As in 9.1O, the dots stand for the contribution from other
values of k.
Using the contraction formulas of Eq. (4.42) and remembering
that this entire expression is sandwiched between u(p') and u(p), the
numerator can be written as 4p pl"Yw So we obtain
rfl)
~
= ie 2 p. P''Y
1
IR
d'k
1
1
(2rr)4 Poko - p . k + if Pok o - P . k + iE
x
k5 -
k2
+ if
+ ...
(12.113)
There are four poles of k o in the integrand. Let us choose the contour
of integration to enclose the upper half plane, so that it will cbntain
only one of them, viz., ko = -w + if, where w = k. The result of the
ko-integration will be 2rri times the residue at this pole, so
fl)
r~ = -e 'Y~
1
IR
d k
p' p'
(2)3
rr (I" . k)(p k)( -2w)
+ ... ,
(12.114)
rfl) _ a "I
~ - (2rr)2 ~
where now
then
k~
rdk
J w
3
IR
p' p'
(I'" k)(p . k)
+ ...
,
(12.115)
-(')[_'rfll]
()A~-- (2rr)2A<O
a
,;
up
te ~ up e -
rdk
3
JIR --;;;-
p.p'
(p'. k)(p k)
+ ....
(12.116)
282
d k
p2
-,-;;-;o.A
.,.-!'-"'"'"
{2,,)2 o IR w (p. k)2 .
o
(12.117)
3
o .Ao
_d_k [ p2
2{2,,)2
1lR w (p.k)2
+ .,....;-p'...,.2;oJ
(12.118)
{p'k)2
.A,=[1
o
2{2,,)2
1lR
3
d k (-p
w
pk
- -p')2
- + ... J.Ao.
p'k
(12.119)
When we square this, the cross term exactly cancels the infra-red
divergent contribution in the Bremsstrahlung amplitude given in Eq.
(9.138). Of course the 0(02) term appearing in l.A l2 is infra-red
divergent as well. But to see the cancellation of that, we need to
consider terms of higher order in 0 for the Bremsstrahlung amplitude..
The part of the integral written as dots will contribute to finite 1loop corrections, and to cancellation of ultra-violet divergences, both
of which we have already seen.
The counterterms were introduced to eliminate the ultra-violet
divergences. But we now see that they are required to cancel the
infra-red divergences. We have used only the vertex counterterm for
this calculation. This is because the fermions are on-shell, therefore
fermion self-energy counterterms cancel exactly with the self-energy
loop diagrams. The photon is not on-shell here, but its counterterm
has no infra-red divergence and so is irrelevant for this calculation.
We have done the analysis for scattering from an external source
and the associated Bremsstrahlung. But a similar analysis can be
performed for the general situation where the infra-red divergence of
soft photon emission from external charged particles in any process is
canceled by the infra-red divergence of soft virtual photon exchange
between external lines. Further it can be shown that the cancellation
is effective at all orders of perturbation theory.
Chapter 13
13.1
Classification of symmetries
Symmetrif'~~
284
13.2
13.2.1
Symmetry group
2. There must bc an clement e in the group such that e 0 x x 0 e = x for each element x. This e is called the identity.
3. Each element x must possess an inverse in the group, i.e., there
must exist another element called X-I such that x 0 x-I =
x-lox = e.
(y 0 z)
13.2.
285
case.,
(lwt
tlu:
in:IJI'.r:'\f,
oj u typicul
(J!
the
f0l'111 C
ifl
HIl/ln
lTHLlt.i.vhr,ution. of r,om,
d)
Exercise 13.2 Show thnl the folhnl1iHg ~wt of d(,lTtt'ltlli do nnt form
u group lilt/le.,.. the ll)l('cifir.d "yrou'P lrl1l1til'linllion" Opt'.Tution.
0.) POMitiur intege.rs lLlllLe.T nrlrLilion of
1lItlrtb('l'H;
1l-dimt:n~ionnl
lion.
Shl)~ll t.hut the. Lorentz t.rnn;;foTTlllLtion llUlt.rices ~(Ll~
isfying lh.e COflilition ill Eq. (1.28) for1ll n ~jl'OU1) 1I1l(lt.r Hlnh'ix. multiplic.o.tion.
o Exercise 13.3
286
13.2.2
(13.1)
as mentioned in Eq. (4.91). Thus the element.s of tI", symmetry group
in this case are complex numbers of the form e- iq8 , and two such
elements combine by the law of multiplication of complex numbers.
Alternatively, these elements can be viewed H.'i I-dimensional unitary
matrices, which combine by the law of multiplication of matrices. For
this reason, this symmetry group is denotcd by U(I) .- the letter
IU' for unitary matrices, and the number ill the parenthesis for the
(C?sO -.inO)
smB
cosB
(.r)
.
y
(132)
ShoUl that the.se transformations ure Qlll\)/tll'-nt to U (1) tro.nsforma.tiona on the object z =
iy.
(13.3)
Of course this is invariant under independent pha.-'ic rotations of the
two fields, i.e., two independent U(l) transformations. This symmetry is called U(I) x U(I). However, in the special case of Tn, = m2,
the symmetry is even larger. This is best seen by constructing the
object
(13.4)
VJl
and
1/J2
287
nents of,p\ do not mix with those of ,p2 under Lorentz transformations. However. here we will be considering an internal symmetry
transformation in which the elements of two different spinors will
mix with each other. For this purpose, it is sufficient to suppress the
component structure of each spinoT and treat each of them as one
single object. The object -V can then justifiably be called a doublet.
Using this doublet, we can cast the Lagrangian of Eq. (13.3) into the
form
!L' =
I{J
(i{.!- m) -V,
(13.5)
-V' = U-v ,
(13.6)
Exercise 13.5 Argue that the free Lagrangia.n of n Dira.c fields ha.s
a. U (n) 81:lmmetry ij the mQ.sses .oj nll the. Jc-nTLions nre equal.
-V' =
V'Y51{J ,
(13.7)
288
"'n
"'p
where
and
denote the proton and the neutron fields respectively. There are three pion fields, with charges +1, 0 and -I in
units of proton charge. To include them, consider a triplet of real
scalar fields:
(13.9)
Now consider the following Lagrangian, which includes the free Lagrangian of these fields, as well as their interactions:
~ =
IlJ (il!
m) IlJ
I
1 2
2(8.4. (8"4 - 2/" 4>.4>
I
2-
-4,,(4)4>) +ig'lJl'sTallJ4'a,
(13.10)
where T a are the usual Pauli matrices. The last term includes interactions like ig'''pI'S'''n(4), + ;4>2). Looking at this term, we see that
(4), +i4>2) should annihilate a positively charged particle. We identify
this with ,,+. The properly normalized pion fields arc
I
13.2.
289
notation~
--+
one can
writ~
eiLJO X,
(13.14)
where X is any field. and B = 1 for the nucleons 'Uld ",ern for the pions. This B is usually called baryon numlw,., ",,,I the U(l) symmetry
the baryon number symmetry.
In addition to this symmetry, OIlt' call ch('ck that the Lagrangian
of Eq. (13.10) is also invariant IInder til(' J\lohal SU(2) transformations defined by
where the
by
Tn ':-;
(-iii" ~ )
IjI
exp
1>
exp(-i(J"T,,)1>.
T2 =
i)
0 0
0 00
( -i 0 0
IjI ,
(13.15)
tht~ lIlat.ri~f~s
T.=
To
Rre
O-iO)
00 .
(o 0
i
given
(13.16)
Exercise 13.6 Show tha.t the matrix f'Xp (-iI3" 1-) \ ulhich induce~
the transformation on the nucleon jietds, hax ctf':lerminant equal to
unity for a.nll ua.luc oj Uu'. purumeters (:J".
13:2.3
290
Exercise 13.8 A general n x n comple,x ma.trix has 2n 2 Tool -puTameteT8. Show that if this matm is unitary, th.e n.umbe_t' of inde'Pendent real "pa.ra.meter~ is n 2 . If th.e determil\.o:nt is 1.mity, the numbe,..
1.8n 2 -1.
(13.17)
This rneans that the infinitesimal elements of the group can be writ
ten as
(13.18)
using the summation convention for the index ll.. For 1\ class of groups
called Lie groups which includes the unitary groups that we have been
discussing, this implies that the general group clement is given by
U = exp (-if3.T.) ,
(13.19)
where the f3o's need Ilot be small. Obviously, the choices for T.
are not unique. Que can always define some linearly independent
combinations of the /3a IS to be the independent parameters, in which
case the generators will also be linear combinations of the Ta's given
above.
(l
11edor apa.ce.
291
= exp
(A + B + ~[A,BJ1
(13.20)
202
13.2.4
Representations
A representation of a group is a set of linear transformations or matrices R(x) defined for all elements x belonging t.o the group and
y).
(13.23)
(13.24)
this satisfies Eq. (13.23). The generators ill this representation are
given by T a = 0 for all a. This is called the singlet representation.
Another important representation ean be defined through the
structure constants of the group. To see t.his, let. us define the matrices Ta by the following matrix elements:
(Tc)ab
= -
ifabe'
(13.25)
Obviously, the dimensionality of these matrices is equal to the number of generators in the group, Le., n 2 - 1 for SU(n). One can now
293
check that these matrices indeed satisfy the algehra of the group. The
representation so defined is called the adjoint rep7'sentation of the
group. There are, of course, many other representations of a group.
But in this hook, we will need only the one~ mentioned. above.
Representations determine how fields trallsform under the symmetry groop. For example, in Eq. (13.15), the SU(2) doublet W transforms in the fundamental representation and the triplet cf> transforms
in the adjoint representation. In general, the tniIlsformation of an
n-plet is obtained by using; the n-dimellsiutlal representation of the
group.
o Exercise 13.10 Vel'ijy the .luc.obi inentit1j,
= 0,
(13.26)
which is sulisped beCnlLf\e the multiplication. of the generators is (LSsoc.iatiue. U lie. this to ueT'i!'y th,a.t the matrl.CI'.S dc.jinen in Eq. (13.25)
indeed ~ntisfy th'o nlgebra giuen in Eq. (1 ~1. 22).
13.3
Approximate symmetries
(13.27)
294
13.4
295
13.4.1
Discrete symmetry
Consider a theory with only one real scalar field, governed by the
Lagrangian
(13.28)
Clearly, this is symmetric under the following transformation
4>~
-4>,
(13.29)
which produces a discrete symmetry group. This has some interesting consequences. For example, if we treat 4> as a quantum field, the
symmetry says that processes involving odd number of quanta of this
field should not take place. This statement has a loophole which we
will now investigate.
Using the usual procedure elaborated in connection with Eq.
(3.7), we obtain
' =
( 13.30)
~Jl24>2 + ~>'4>4.
(13.31 )
296
(13.32)
There are three solutions to this equation. To determine which one
really corresponds to the minimum, we need some more information
about the parameters involved.
Let us first discuss the parameter oX. Of course oX has to be real
because the Hamiltonian has to be hermitian (or real, if we insist
on a purely classical vocabulary). For very large values of the field,
the potential, and therefore the Hamiltonian, is dominated by 'the
oX4>~1 term. Thus, if oX < 0, the value of V(4)) becomes smaller and
smaller (more and more negative) as 4>cl increases, and the classical
potential does not have any minimum. This will be a system without
a ground state, which indicates an unstable system. In other words,
the existence of a ground state demands that.
oX > 0.
(13.33)
(a)
(b)
1"
297
If /1-2 < 0, the potential function looks like Fig. 13.1b and the real
minima are obtained at
1>c1
hii
VT
(13.34)
Now we have two minima, and they are degenerate, as can be seen
Let us now turn to quantum field theory. The classical field now
should be interpreted as the expectation value of the field 1> in the
ground state, or the vacuum. This is caJled the vacuum expectation
value of the field, or VEV for short. Everything that we have said
so far about the classical field will now he valid about the VEV of
the field 1>. Thus if /1-2 < 0, the VEV of the field 1> can be either of
the two solutions given in Eq. (13.34). It does not matter which one,
but let us call this value v:
(011)10)
= v '" o.
(13.35)
(13.36)
where this T/(x) is a quantum field in the sense of Eq. (3.18), i.e.,
which has zero VEV and therefore can be expanded in terms of creation and annihilation operators. Then,
(0 I'll 0) = 0,
(13.37)
and so Eq. (13.35) is satisfied. The field 11(X) can therefore be interpreted as the fluctuations around the classical value of the field,
which was denoted hy v.
298
+ 3AV')I)' A
AVI)3 - 41)4
(13.38)
In writing these forms, we have used the relation Jl' = -AV' which
follows from Eq. (13.34), and also omitted a constant term in the
Lagrangian as it has no effect on the physics of the system. What
we see from the final form is that the quantum of the field I) has a
given by
mass
m.
( 13.39)
And, because of the presence of the 1)3 term, the Lagrangian is not
invariant under the operation of a sign change of the quantum field.
So we can have processes with an odd number of I) quanta in the
external lines.
The Lagrangian of Eq. (13.28) had the symmetry. But the values
of the parameters may be such that the ground state of the Hamiltonian does not obey this symmetry. Whenever the ground state is
not invariant under a symmetry of the Lagrangian, the phenomenon
is called spontaneous symmetry breaking. The name derives from
the fact that in this case, symmetry breaking is not driven by any
external agent, but rather the Lagrangian itself leads to a situation
where the symmetry is not obeyed in physical processes. In particular, the fluctuations around this ground state will not also manifest
the symmetry.
One can argue at this point that the Lagrangian of Eq. (13.38)
does not have the symmetry of Eq. (13.29) anyway, so this amounts
to explicit symmetry breaking in the Lagrangian written in terms
of the quantum field. But there is an important difference between
the two cases. To appreciate it, suppose we wanted to write down a
Lagrangian in terms of a scalar field I), without paying any attention
to the discrete symmetry of Eq. (13.29). We would have obtained
a mass term, an 1)3 term and an 1)4 term in that case. But the c0efficients of these terms would have been completely independent of
299
one another. On the other hand, in the case of spontaneous symmetry breaking, the coupling constants with these three terms are
determined by two parameters, A and v. This means that there is
a relation between these parameters, which is the remnant of the
original symmetry.
13.4.2
U(I) symmetry
(13.40)
This Lagrangian has a global U(1) symmetry corresponding to the
transformations
(13.41)
As in 13.4.1, we can argue that the vacuum expectation value
of the field should be independent of space-time, so we need to
minimize the potential, which in this case is
(13.42)
Spontaneous symmetry breaking can occur if !J.2
minimum is obtained if
1(0110)1 =
~,
< 0,
(13.43)
where
(13.44)
Only the magnitude of the VEV is determined by the minimization
condition. The phase can be arbitrary. The minima corresponding to
all values of this phase have the same energy, Le., they are degenerate.
The system can be in any of these minima.
Let us assume that the vacuum is where the phase value is zero,
i.e., the VEV of is v /.;2. Following the same arguments as in
300
13.4.1, we can say that 4>(x) cannot be the quantum field in this
case. We can write
4>(x) =
~(v+')(X)+i(X)),
(13.45)
where 1J(x) and (x) have zero VEVs, and can therefore be expanded
in creation and annihilation operators. Rewriting the original L....
grangian in terms of these quantum fields, we obtain
1
!f = 2(8"'))(a~'))
+ 2(8"()(a~()
->'v,)(1J'
- >.vV
>.
+ (') - -(')'
+ (')' .
4
(13.46)
13.4.3
Non-Abelian symmetry
(13.47)
301
4>cl
= (014)10) =
(~)
(13.49)
One can now check that although the quantum field corresponding
to 4>3 is massive, the fields 4>. and 4>2 are massless. This constitutes
another example of Goldstone1s theorem, which we now discuss.
13.5
Goldstone's theorem
13.5.1
(1350)
302
Using the generators !]I of translational symmetry which are the momenta, we can write jo(x) = ei!J'., jo(O)e-i::i'., etc, Since the vlll:uum
has to be translationally invariant, e-i!J"'IO) = 10), so that
(13,51 )
The integrand is independent of x since it contains operators at the
space-time origin onlYl and is non-vanishing since
(13,52)
IQ)
= e-i'Q 10)
(13,53)
(13,54)
Since (0 IAI 0) = 0 for a quantum field, this gives
(OIlQ(t), Al_IO)
= a '" 0,
(13,55)
'f J
303
d x ( (0 IjO(O)1 n) (n
- (OIAln)
(nIj'I(Oll0) eipn , )
iEnl
(13.56)
~;
=
=
aJ.Lj~
0,
J (0
At 0)
Jd (0 [al.j~, AI- - IV j.AI- 0)
J x(01 [Vj,AI-IO).
= -
[:tjO(x),
d x
3
(13.57)
The last. term involves an integral over all space and can be written
as a surface integral at infinity. The surface illtegral vanishes because
the commutator is between A somewhere interior to the volume and
j on the surface, operators separated by very large space-like interval.
Therefore, it shows that a mnst be time-independent.
Looking back at Eq. (13.56) now, we try to argue how the right
hand side may be time-independent and IlOIl-ZCro. The positive and
llegative energy parts each are time dependent, and they cannot cancel ill general. The time independence can be obtained if, for a state
which satisfies the condition (0 IAI n) (n Ull(O) I0) # 0, we also have
En = 0 for Pn = O. This is therefore a millisless state, with the
same quantum numhers as jo and A. This massless state is called
a Nambu-Goldstone boson associated with the symmetry breaking.
This boson need not bc an observable st.ate. We will encounter unphysical states of this kind in 13.6.
13.5.2
304
(13.59)
We chose the VEV of the field 4> in the direction of its real part,
which means that 4>2 has a zero VEV, whereas 4>, has a non-zero VEV
denoted by v. Thus Eq. (13.59) shows the existence of an operator,
viz. 4>2, whose commutator with the charge has a non-zero VEV. In
this case, 4>2 plays the role of the operator A introduced in 13.5.J.
According to the general proof, the Nambu-Goldstone boson will be
a state In) such that (014)21 n) ~ O. This is certainly satisfied if In}
is the quantum of the field 4>2 itself. Indeed, that is what we found
in 13.4.2, where we had denoted the imaginary part of the field 4>
by (.
In the other example of 13.4.3, we started with an SU(2) symmetry, which had three generators. After symmetry breaking, a U(I)
group remains unbroken, as indicated in Ex. 13.11 (p301). This
means that the Lagrangian after the symmetry breaking does not
change if acted upon by the elements of this group. From the generators given in Eq. (13.16) and the vacuum expectation value in Eq.
305
so that
( 13.61)
The intuitive meaning of this statement is the following. The original
symmetry was 8U(2). which is locally the san,e as 80(3), the orthogonal group with three variables. Under t.I)(' SO(3) transformations,
the quantity q, . cP remains invariallt. Once we have spontaneous
symmetry breaking, this symmetry cannot h~ Iwtllifest. However if
we choose the VEV to be "long the 4>" Jim:t.ion, we still h"ve a 1'0tatiotlal syrrullctry in the tPl-c!>2 plane, which is exactly the remnant
U(I) mentioned in Ex. 13.11 (p30l). W.' thell "'" t.lmt two of the
three original gCIlp.rators have bP.e1l hrokl'lI. And th~r(' .UP. also two
Goldstone bOSOH:; 4>1 and 4>2o
Exercise 13.12 C()n~ider UlC L(tnT<Ul!ji.Il.U of Eq. (I :L41) and 'Write
the. ("..()1U~('lUl'.d ch,arge.R of th.e. SL1(2) ~l.Illllltdrll. Show I.h.nt, Ulh.f.lt
the ::lljmmetrl.l i~ brokp.n b1) Eq. (1:3.49) lhe nlH\Tll.uhll.nn of brok(~n
ehnrge.~ wit.h GOtdSt01ll' h01:'on~ l).Cll)(' lwn-rll.lI.i.!oihilt!J VEV~.
13.5.3
(13.62)
At the tree level. t.h(~ diagm.ll1s for t.his process arr. given in
Fig. 13.2. The Fe.ynmau amplitude call 1)(' (~lk1l1at.ed from the Lagrangian of Eq. (13.46) to he
.
jj
1.. 4<
-2"
'"
,(-2i.\1ij2
(I'
+ k)
i(-2;.\I))'
(I' - k')
i(-Gi.\,')(-2;.\v)
+ Ik' -
.,
k)- -
2'
111."
13.63
306
..
.
'
((k)'"
/((k')
((ki..
./((k')
(
... ----
1)(p)./ .....1)(p' )
11(P)./
.!I(p')
..
((ki
((ki.
,,(p')
.(W)
!(,
:1)
,
71(P)/ .....((k')
..
A c.omment is in order fnr the Ilumf!rical factors 011 the right hand
side. For example. the fir:::;! term comes frolll tlw 1]2(2 interaction
term in Eg. (13.46). The coefficient of this t.erm in the Lagrangian
is ->../2. Howp.ver, eat]} of the operators 11 CH.1l either allIlihilatc the
initial TJ particle. or create the final one, This introduces a permutation factor of 2, as mentioned in ~j6.6. Similarly. we get a factor
of 2 for the two factors of (. This leans t.o t.1", nllmerical co-efficient
-2.-\ of t.he fir~t term. The coefficients on t.h~ ot.her t.erms appear for
similar rea.')olls.
Now, using k'2 = k''2 = 0 and p2 = pf'2 = m~ = 2>...,,"2, we call write
it Il..<;
.4'( = - 2>' _
(2).,,)'1
(2).,,)2
m; - 2p . k'
711; + 2p . k
-2>' 1 +
7tI
2
1}
m.~
+ 2)) . k
+ HI 2
11
(6)',,)(2>'v)
-'-,;-~c;-+:
711; + 2k . k '
3ut;,]
m,~
-
2), . k'
1/!.
2"
'I
..
2fl: . ,.;.'
(13.64)
Remembering the kinematical relations p' k = p'. k' iLlld p' k' = p'. k,
we see that this amplitnde vanbhes if eiUH'r of t.1H~ Colcbtone boson:;
ha...' zero 4-1lI0IlHmtlllIl. i,p.. if either k l ' = (] or ]..;'1 = u.
1
o Exercise 13.14
SUlnf:
morld.
Tltl'
in.itiol
307
(1365)
which uan'ishes
Tnomentu1n.
if
CLn1J
+ 1)(x) e,(xl/"
J2
(13.66)
If we keep only up to linear terms in the quantum fields, this representation coincides with that of Eq. (13.45). However, this form
is illuminating for a different reason. If ((x) were a constant in
space-time, it would have been a 'constant phase for the field 1>. And
the phase of </> does not appear in the Lagrangian - that is in fact
the U(I) symmetry that the Lagrangian has. Thus, only space-time
derivatives of ( can appear in the Lagrangian. Indeed, substituting
Eq. (13.66) in the Lagrangian of Eq. (13.40). we obtain
!L' =
4
-41 A(v+1)).
( 13.67)
This clearly shows that the field ( enters into the Lagrangian only
through its derivatives. Thus, the Feynman rule for all the vertices
involving this field will have at least one power of 4-momentum of
Goldstone bosons, and should vanish if the 4-momentum is taken to
zero.
308
13.6
pr(l('.t'.88
o.nd show
Higgs mechanism
(13.69)
The potentia] of lhis model is ident,ical with tl,at of the model of
13.4.2 with a global U(I) symmetry. Thus, t.he solution for the
ground state remains the Hame, and we call define the quantum fields
as in Eq. (13.45). When we write down the Lagrangian in terms of
the quantum fields, the part coming from t.he potential is exactly the
same as in Eq. (13.46). The interesting part is the modified 'kinetic'
term (D"<It(D"<I. Using Eq. (13.45), we find
(D"<It(D"q,) =
~(iJI'rJ)(a"'I) + ~(8"()(a,,()
1
+evA"a,,( + '2,2,,2 A" A" + ..
(13.70)
where the dots stand for terms which cOIlt.ain at lca.:.;;t three fields
and are therefore interaction terms. Comparing with the Proca Lagrangian of Eq. (8.21), we see that the U(I) gauge b",on has a mass
term after the symmetry is broken, and the ma.."iS is given by
(13.71)
But before we conclude that the gauge bo....on is massive, there is
a problem to settle. There is a term A"D"( in Eg. (13.70). Notice
that it is qnadratic in the fields, so it should be part of the free
309
The cross term present here would pair up with the problematic
term of Eq. (13.70) to make up a total divergence, which can be
disregarded in the Lagrangian. Including this gauge fixing term, the
terms quadratic in the gauge boson field can be summarized as below:
2:rA)=_~F pV_~(aAP)2+~M2APA
A
o
2~P
4Pv
P'
(13.73)
,
iLl.(k) = k 2
- ~
M2'
(13.76)
Exercise 13.16 VeTilY that tile propagators 01 the U(I) gauge jield
and the jir.ld ( that 101l0Ul lrom Eq. (13.1:1) and (13.14) are giuen
by Eq. (13.15) and (13.16).
In quantum field theory, the pole of the propagator gives the mass
of the corresponding particle. However, here we seem to have some
problem with the poles. Of course the gauge boson propagator has
a pole at k 2 = M~, which corresponds to a pole at its mass. But it
310
Chapter 13.
+ a~O(x).
(13.77)
'(x) = v+r/(x)
A~(x)
J2
A~(x) + ~a~((x).
ev
(13.78)
311
Chapter 14
Yang-Mills theory of
non-Abelian gauge fields
In Gh. 9, we constructed QED, which is a gauge theory based on
a U(I) symmetry. In this chapter, we will see how to write down
the Lagrangian. of gauge theories based on non-Abelian symmetries.
Such theories are often called Yang-Mills theories after the people
who discovered their structure. We will see that they have some
novel fcatures which were absent in the Abelian gauge theory of
QED.
14.1
2'01<
= IIi (if; -
01) IIi,
(14.1)
Here IIi
IS
an n-plet of
313
w~ w' = Uw,
(14.2)
(14.3)
n' -
2'=IIi(i.Q-m)W,
(14.4)
W ~ >V' = U(x)>V ,
(14.6)
= W (~- m) W + WU-'i')'"(8"U)>V
- gWU-'1'"TaUWA~.
(14.7)
314
Chapter 14.
ll.'l
1
:(ap U)U- I + UTn A"UJI
.
(14.8)
.9
We have thus gauged the global SU(n) synHnetry, and the fields
are the gange fields that have emerged.
A~
(14.9)
Although we started with the definition of the covariant derivative D~ which mimics the U(I) gauge theory, we notice that some
new features have already emerged in the Hon-Abelian case. To see
them, let us write down the transformation properties of the fermion
U(x)
= exp ( -
(14.10) .
+ a~(3" + gfabc(3b(T)A~ .
(14.11)
14.2.
315
For the gauge fields, remembering the definition of the arljoint reprcscntlHion given in Eq. (13.25), we can writi'
A '"
j.J
= A"Jt
. (ih
1.g
[1:(b "'I)]
A'II
(14.13)
'"
14.2
( 14.14)
On the other hand, the ucfillitiotl of the covariant deriva.tive for U(l)
is given in Eq. (9.15). which is
D,,<I! =
o"lj; + -ieQA,,(:r)d'.
(14.15)
316
Chapter 14.
~auge
fields
(14.16)
Using the same prescription then, we will obtain
(14.17)
In other words, for the U(1) gauge theory, we could have defined the
electromagnetic field tensor as
(14.18)
and written the pure gauge Lagrangian as
(14.19)
This might have been more elegant in some sense, viz" that the
Lagrangian of the photon field resembled more closely the gaugecovariant kinetic term for scalar field. Ell t as we see from Eq. (14.17),
it would not have made any difference in the content.
Let us now return to non-Abelian gauge theorie!':i. Hen\ the infinitesimal transformation law for a field W in the fundamental representation is giver, ill Eq. (14.11), whereas the covariant derivative
appears in Eq. (14.5). Again, we see that the gauge covariant derivative is obtained by replacing the gauge tran~formation parameters (3a
of Eq. (14.11) by -A~ ill the non-trivial terlll of the cov"ri"nt derivative. Going back now to the infiuitesimal transforlllatiun property of
317
the gauge fields in Eq. (14.11), we can write the covariant derivative
of the gauge fields as
(14.20)
Let us now try to see why this definition is llseful. If we consider
the gauge transformation property of the covariant derivative acting
on any field, the transformed quantity does not involve any derivative
of the transformation parameters. This was shown for the covariant
derivatives of fermion fields in Eq. (9.17) for the U(I) theory and in
Eq. (14.9) for an SU(n) theory. We can try the same thing on the
covariant derivative of the gauge field. It is convenient to transform
Eq. (14.20) to Ii matrix equation by multiplying both sides by the
generators Ta in the fundamental representation and summing over
the gauge index a, After making a gauge transformation now lone
obtains
We
(14.23)
it will be gange invariant and Lorentz invariant. Using tr (TaTb) =
~5ab from E'l. (13.24), we finally arrive at the pure Yang-Mills LagrangIan:
""
1 FaIW F''"
...z.YM
-_ - 4"
I'l
(14.24)
Chapter 14.
318
Again, this looks very much like the U(I) i(auge Lagrangian, but it
has to be remembered that
v cont.ains a term which is CJuadratic
in the gauge fields. It is easy to see that a mass term of the form
~M2A~A~ would not respect the gauge symmetry, just a, in the U(I)
case.
F::
(14.25 )
where D J, L~ now considered to be an o-pel'nf.oT th.at 0pf',Tales on any
th.ing to its right.
o Exercise 14.5 Show that the .f\e.ld shf'.ngth tensors ~a.ti8jy the
ide,ntii"
(1426)
These are tile anologs of the homogeneous MU:tUlt'.ll c.quations\ called
tnc Bia1lchi ide1ltlty. IHint: It is easy if yau use Eq. (14.25).1
14.3
We have encouutered two different kinds of interactions of nonAbelian gange. fields so far. First, as in the c",,", of QED, the gauge
fields interact with other particles in the theory. And second, because
of the presence of the nOll-linear terms in the definition of F~'.d the
pure gauge Lagra.ngian involves interaction t.erms among the gauge'
fields. Let us discuss these one by one.
14.3.1
Ae.a
(14.28)
319
where we have to use the generators of the appropriate representation. For a particle in the singlet representation , Tr, = 0 for all a.
so there is no gauge interaction. And for all particles in non-trivial
representations, there will be some gauge illteractioll.
This contains the kinetic terms for the scalar fields in the multiplet
~, but in addition contains the interaction terms
~nl = ig(a,,4>j)(T"A~4 - ig(TnA~,4t(i:I"4
+/(T"A~4t(nAf.4 .
(14.30)
The vertices involve two scalar particles, with p.ither one or two gauge
hosons.
14.3.2
Using the definition of F;v from Eq. (14.20), t.he pure gange Lagrangian of Eq. (14.24) can be written as
UL
~YM
V
t"
(14.31)
The terms involving only the derivatives of the gauge fields are t.he
kinetic terms! but in addition this Lagrangian contains interactions
among the gauge bosons. There arc cubic and quartic interactions.
The Feynman rules for t.hese vertices are given in Fig. 14.1.
320
: -9Iobe[(q - T)"g",
+ (T -
P)"9'" + (p - q)>.g,,"]
Figure 14.1: Feynman rules for cubic and quartic interactions among gauge
bosons. We have taken the convention that all momenta are coming into the
vertices.
gla'b'c,Af:;A~, (8oA~) ,
(14.32)
where we have also changed the notations for the indices appearing
in the expression. Let us now re[~r to the vertex in Fig. 14.1. Suppose all the momenta are pointed towards the vertex. There will be
several contributions to this vertex, depending on which particles are
A~.
Exercise 14.8 VerihJ the Feynmnn rule. Jor the. quartic uerte:r
giuen in Fig_ 14.1.
14.4
321
2.'
~,
(14.34)
~_
Jo
82.' OAt
82.' ow
[82.' o~
]
8(8~At) 0(30 + 8(8~w) 0(30 + 8(8~~) 0(30 + h.c. ,(14.35)
where ow etc are changes of the fields under infinitesimal gauge transformations characterized by transformation parameters (30' This
gives
(14.36)
Notice that the gauge current now includes contributions from the
gauge fields. This is because of the fact that the gauge fields transform non-trivially under gauge transformations. As a result, gauge
fields carry non-Abelian charge, as was mentioned before.
Using the Lagrangian, we can derive the classical equations of
motion for the fields. For the Yang-Mills fields, these are
(14.37)
This looks similar to the classical equation of motion for the electromagnetic field, Eq. (8.8). The difference, however, is that the
currents contain Yang-Mills fields as well. An alternative way of
writing Eq. (14.37) is
D
where
j~
~Fa
j.!V-)Vl
(14.38)
322
14.5
Quantization
fields
of
non-Abelian
gauge
323
The only interaction of these ghost fields C'U1 itlso be read off from
Eg. (14.42). This is an interaction vertcx involving a gauge boson.
The Feynman rule for this vertcx is
(14.44)
This Feyuman rule show:-; why we could a.voici discussing the ghost
fields for the Abelian case. The structurc constants an' all zero for
an Abelian group, so the ghosts have no int.eraction with a.ny other
field at all. For non-Abelian gauge groups. this is not the case, and
one must use thC'-sc fields in order to obtain correct results. However,
it is possihle to consistently project out states cOlltaining ghost fields
from the Hilbert spaces of initial and filial st.ates. Thcn ghost-free
physical states evolve only into other ghost.-free states. As a result,
the ghost fields appear only in joops ..., virtnal I""tides. For tree
level calculations, they are irrelevant..
Con.~idfT the I-toolJ !{f'lJ-C.1Lf'r!l'!I fliuqn'1m~ Jor non
Abelian ~o.uge fidd~. Th.f'_Te will be loop~ iH\lnluing other particles
that cou-pte with guuge hOSOll~ 0.8 fOT QED (Jermio1t~, sc:ula.nJ etc.).
But nnw the.re. 'will bt' diugraml'5 inuoh1inu !IClll!II' h01WltR ill the tOO'lll
as in Fig. 14.2n 1b. Calculate. theRe 1.11:0 clill!-jl"mll!'\ in the. Ft'.'ynmun't. Hooft gClUgt', awl Rhou: tho.t the l1UClill.1ll 1IOlflnz.ut.ion i~ not gnuge
int:uTiant, i.~., ib t.t',lllwr structure i:'-l not. k'2.'h'lI ~ kl,k,,, (18 urgued in
Ch.. 12. jnr Abelian theories. Nom udd th/" ('lllltriblLtlOll of Fig. 14.2c
inuoluillq u ghost loop a.nd ucrifu lIluL Ofl(' l'l"'~luill}\ tIl{'. nece88urll U>;nSal' struct.urt'.. IHint: U 8t'. dime.nJoll0nul rt'!}ulnriz.utiolt.1
o Exercise 14.10
14.6
Quantum Chromodynamics
324
(b)
(a)
,
, ....
.'
(c)
Figure 14.2:
pure non-Abelian
gauge theory.
m q. ) iJAa,
(14.45)
where the sum over A runs over different quarks. Obviously this free
Lagrangian is invariant under a global SU(3) symmetry under which
three colors transform like a triplet. If we try to gauge this color
325
Chapter 15
15.1
Gauge group
15.1.1
H..,)
well. In analogy
with QED, let ns try 1.0 think of this proce'" as being mediated by
326
327
v,
II
Jennion
328
t/J whose TJ.eigenl.lutue is tJ under the go.u~e- group, show that the
intera.ctions with the neutral gauge boson "' ::1 i8 given by
(15.1)
8U(2) triplet, with the neutron transforming as the zeroth comp<>nent. According to Eq. (15.1), the neutroll will not have fundamental
couplings with the uncharged gauge bosoll ill this case, and the gauge
boson can then be identified with the photoll. These possibilities are
not phenomenologically successful.
Alternatively, we could keep the fermions in doublets, but acknowledge that the neutral gauge boson of tl", 8U(2) we have been
considering is not the photon. In this ca,e. if we want to construct
a theory that includes the photon as well. we need a larger gauge
group. The smallest gauge group which contains one more gauge
boson apart from the 8U(2) ones is 5U(2) )( U(I), or equivalently
U(2). This leads to the standard electroweak theory, which has been
tremendously sucC<'.ssful ill describing weak and electromagnetic interactions. This is the theory we want to outline in this chapter.
15.1.2
Tj
J2(T x
T,
. y
(OJ2)
+ 2T
0
} =
-
iTy )
C() )
0 -1
( J20
() 0)
(15.2)
329
/+-3
/+3+
1-3-
-1-+3
= -i ,
= - h++ = i ,
=
-h--
(15.3)
= -i.
in this basis. The U(I) generator will have to commute with all SU(2)
generators, and therefore must be a multiple of the unit matrix.
Corresponding to the four generators, there are four gauge hosans
in this theory. We will call the SU(2) gauge bosons
and
W~. The U(I) gauge boson will be called B w The generator of this
U(I) is not the electric charge (it is something called hypercharge)
and so B~ is r:ot the photon field. The photon will be identified later.
The pure gauge Lagrangian, containing the E?;auge fields only, can be
written as
W:' W;
<p
-Lg suge -
I B
4"
Bl'v
(15.4)
wbw,
J1
(15.5)
IHI
where
W JW
VJi
W"v
iJv W
iJ. - 9 1alK'
II
330
15.2
15.2.1
idea in the present cont.ext, we need some sca.lar fields in the theory.
Let us introduce a .calar multiplet which is a doublet under the
SU(2) part of the gauge group, and write this as
(15.7)
On the right, we have ::;l1ow11 the gauge transformation properties of
DJ.l =
JJ
. T(n)w
. 'YB Ii
+ 1.9
a
I.l + 19
a
(15.9)
where T!") deuote the generators of SU(2) in the n-dimensional rej>resentation, and Y is the identity matrix times the hypercharge. For
the doublet , the SU(2) generators are Ta /2, and we can write
(::)
(15.10)
15.2.
331
Let us now suppose, as in various cxamples 011 spoutallcous symmetry breaking in Ch. 13, that 1,2 < 0 in Eq. (15.8). In this case, the
gauge sYlllIllctry will bc spontaneollsly brok~l\. The minimuJII for the
scalar potential will be ohtained for ~calar ricld COil figurations given
by
v
rt>"
(15.11)
= /2 X ,
,,=/_,,2/>,.
(15.12)
(15.13)
\.e., X
= (~).
(15.14)
Thus there is one diagonal gencrator which annihilates tile vacuum.
This is a linear combinat,ioll of T3 and Y 1 givell b.y
(15.15)
The original gauge ,yrnmetry is therefore hroken down to a U(I)
sYIIlTlletry gencrated hy Q. Thi, is not the originaJ U(I) part of the
symlllctry group. As we have shown, its generator j::; actually a combination of an 8U(2) generator and the original U(I) generator. To
make this distinction, we will write the origillal sYlllmetry froUl
Oil
flOW
332
as we will see fro!)l the couplings of its gauge boson with fer!)lions.
For now, notice that the superscripts on the cO!)lponents of '" which
appeared in Eq. (15.7) are indeed the electric charges of the corresponding fields.
15.2.2
where 4>+, Hand (are all quantum fields with vanishing expectation
values in the vacuum state. Using this decomposition. we can write
the Lagrangian terms of Eq. (15.8) in tenns of the quantum fields.
Using the expression for D,,4> from Eq. (15.10) and ",hstituting Eq.
(15.16) in it, we find various kinds of terms. Oue of thcse pick up
only the VEV part of the. scalar field 4>. The.e quadratic terms in
the gauge fields are
where
2'2 =
~ (gW,~+9IB"
IIxI1 2 =
2'2 -
J2gW;
J2gW,:
) (
~ )
72
1 '.!
,:\
2
41 g 2 v 2 w,.+W" _ + 8"
(-gU ,. + 9 fl,,) .
I
(15.17)
(15.18)
For any charged spiu-l field V;, of mass M. the. milSs term in the
Lagrangian is A,f2~rVJ'. Thus, the IlHl.5S of the charged W' -boson is
1
MW=2 gv .
(15.19)
-gW; + g' Bj.J of neutral gauge bosuns appearing in Eq. (15.18), we first define the combin"-tions
J
Z" = cos Ow Wj.J - sin8w DIJ
A"
= sin Ow
w;: + ern; Ow B
I, .
(15.20)
333
(15.21)
Then the kinetic terms for Z~ and A~ are properly normalized because this is an orthogonal transformation, and the last term of Eq.
(15.18) can be written as kv2(g2 + gfl)Z~Z~. Since the mass term
for a real spin-1 field v~ is ~M2V~ V~, we conclude that the mass of
the Z particle is
(2
1
M z=-g+g
2
'2) y, v=
Mw .
cos Ow
(15.22)
We see that A~ remains massless even after the symmetry breaking process. As we mentioned, only a part of the gauge symmetry is
broken. There is "remaining V(l) symmetry. A~ is the gauge boson
corresponding to this symmetry. In 15.3, we will see that this gauge
boson is in fact the photon, and so the remnant symmetry is the
V(l) symmetry of QED.
15.2.3
Scalar modes
(15.23)
As argued in 13.6, this shows that the W+ can be annihilated at a
point with the creation of a +, without any ot.her particle interacting
with them. This shows t.hat</>+ is indeed the unphysical mode eaten
up by the W in the process of symmetry breakin!?;. Similarly, W-
334
eats up </>-, and Z eats up the field (. We can see this clearly if
we go to the unitary gauge by writing t.he doublet cb in a manner
similar to what wa., done in Eq. (13.66). In sneh a gange, only the
observable degrees of freedom appear in the Lagrangian. and the
particle interpretation is straight forward.
o Exercise 15.2 ShOUl that Eq.
(15.8) tuhich inuolve n
~:S'i.nglt'.
(15.2~l) ("()'fllnllls
rleri\Jutille.
o Exercise 15.3 * Construct thr, unitury gn.uge. explir.itly blJ writing th~ doublet 1> in. tc.rms oj quantum, tichb l:\O t1lut after a. ga.uge
tTansforTllation the un:physir,ul de.grt',E'.s oj jTer-dam disappe.ur jrom the
Lagrangian.
gauge fixing term snch tilllt the mixed quadratic terms of Eq. (15.23)
disappear from the Lagrangian. As we discussed in 13.6, this can
be achieved if we choose the gauge fixing term to be
(15.24)
The terms of Eq. (15.23) now pair witli the cm'" terms from this
equation to become tota.l divergence terms. awl we are left with the
(
iD,,"
(10)
~
( Z)
iD,,~
r
-I.
10 2 -
Ma,
+ iE
-i
(10) = 102 _ Ml+
''" -
[
iE
,w -
(1 - 010,,10"]
1: 2 - t:Ma,
(15.25)
Ok",:,,]
'2
(15.26)
(I k" - t: M
The unphYRical ~calar propagators a.re similar t.o that ohtained in Eq.
(13.76):
i~($'l(k) =
i~(()(k) =
102
. -t:,\["\I' .
I
10 2 -
t:AI'j, .
(15.27)
(15.28)
This choice of gallg" is called t.he R, gaug". Th" 011 bscript. t: in the
name refers to the gauge parameter: and tht, [t'tter H indicates that
the power-counting rC'lIonnali:tauility of the theory i::; obvious ill this
gauge since all propa~at.ors seale like 11k'}. for largE" vallles of k.
335
There is also a physical scalar mode called the Higgs boson, which
corresponds to the qUi\ntum field H in Eq. (15.16). It is an uncharged
scalar boson with mass given by
M~ = 2.\v 2 .
(15.29)
15.3
When the electroweak theory was first formulated. it. appeared only
as a theory of leptons. Although subsequently the quarks were included in the framework and it is now known that. the theory suffers from some inconsistencies without the quarks. it is simplest to
discuss first the leptonic sector of the theory without bringing. the
quarks in. Moreover, we will start with only the electron and the
electron-neutrino, leaving the other leptons and quarks for 15.3.4.
15.3.1
Gauge interactions
The electron and the electron-neutrino form what is called the first
generation of leptons,. Parity is known to be violated in weak interactions, so it is expected that the different chiral components will
have diffcrcnt interactions. In the standard c1ectroweak model, these
fermions are supposed to transform like the following gauge multiplets:
WeI. -
(~~,)
e/l
1
(2. -2)'
(1,-1).
(15.30)
It should be noted that we have written dowli both the left and right
chiral projc'Ctions of the electron. but olily the left chiml projection
for the neutrino. At the time of the formulation of the theory and
for quite a while afterwards, all laboratory experiments showed that
neut.rinos always appeared to be left halld"d. and t.hat is why t.he
right chiral neutrino .state was assumed not to exist ill the standard
model. As we will see, a consequence of thi:-> assumption is that
the neutrinos turn out to be ma.."islcS-';, III !lI0[P' recent timeoS there
336
has been some indication that neutrinos may have mass. If these
observations are confirmed, some modification of the standard model
would be necessary. It is not clear what the correct modification
would be. Howeverl neutrino masses, even if non-zero, must be small.
For most processes which do not depend crucially on a non-zero
neutrino mass, one can still obtain a good estimate by taking the
neutrinos to be massless. For this reason, we present here the original
version of the standard model, without any possible modifications
which might be prompted by non-zero neutrino masses.
We can write down the gauge interactions for tne leptons. The
gauge covariant kineti<: terms for the leptons are
+ eRi-y~ D"c/i.
(15.31)
D,.
The derivative tcrllls in Eq. (15.31) give the usual kinetic terms
for the elect rOll and the neutrino fields. The other terms in Eq.
(15.31) are the interaction terms of the leptons with the gauge
bosons:
~nl
-\IIcL'Y /1 (g7 (1
2
W,~ - ~dBJ.i)
9 (" w+
-J2
veL'YeL
I!
1JJt'f, +eR'YJ1.g'BJ1.eR
1_
J1.
3
I
-:iVd,'! v,dgW~ - 9 B,,)
1
3
+:ien~Cf,(9W~
(15.33)
The interactions involving W are cal1~d r;harged current interactions because these gauge hosons arc elect.rically charged. These
lead to the following Feynmall rules:
W"
-34
JLL
';2'Y ,
(15.34)
337
!(1-
(15.35)
The Feynman rule for the neutrino vertex with the Z-hoson is thus
given by
Z"
(15.36)
lie
As for the electron, we ca.n rewrite the terms containing the electron field in Eq. (15.33) as
,,>(e) -_
'xnc
1_ "L e(W
2"e"'(
9 ~ - 9 '8)
iJ.
3
+ 9,-"
F:"Y e 8 /i.
(15.37)
go
cas w
e-y"LeZ"+g'e'Y"e(-sinOwZ"+cosOwA")
2CO~ OW e-y" [L -
usmg the definition of the Weinberg angle from Eg. (15.21). The
338
Z,.
(15.39)
The interaction betwccn the electron and A" agrees with QED if we
identify the magnitude of the electron charge as
e = g' cos Ow = gsinBw.
~
(15.40)
Exercise 15.5 Shorn that , for any fermion. oj charge eQ whose leftchiraL component has a T3 -eigenvaluf'. oj t3 and thf'. right-chirnl com
panent is a.n 5U(2) singlet, th.e. Fe.ynmnn rule lor the Z-inteTa.clion
1S
'~
co::> W
)'"(t3L _ Q sm 2 Ow).
(15.41)
15.3.2
Electron mass
So far. we have discussed the gauge covariant derivative terms involving the fermions, which include the kinetic term for free fermions and
the gauge interactions. We now discuss the mass of the fermions.
For any fermion field ,p. the mass term can be written as
(15.42)
Take the electron field, for example. The eL transforms like part
of a doublet under the SU(2) part of the gauge group, and the eR
transforms like a singlet. The combination of the two cannot be
gauge invariant.. Thus, in the fundamental Lagrangian of the standard model, there is no mass term for the electron.
However, the Lagrangiall has spontaneolls symmetry breaking,
and to drive this process, we had to introduce a doublet of Higgs
bosans. Leptons can have gauge invariallt interactions involving the
Higgs bosans. These arc Yukawa-typc interac.tions, given by
YY"k = -h, (I!!,Le R + eR,ptl!!cl.)
where he is
<\
coupling c.onstant.
(15.43)
339
te.rTni'l
of Eq. (15.43)
(lTe
= -he
[;2
(eLeR
(15.44)
The terms involving the vacuum expectation value v of the Higgs field
are the mass terms for the electron field, which have been generated
by the spontaneous symmetry breaking process. Comparing with Eq.
(15.42), we find th"t the electron mass is given in this model in terms
of the Yukawa coupling constant he and the vacuum expectation
value of the Higgs boson field:
(15.45)
The neutrino, on the other hand, remains ma.."islcss even after spontaneous symmetry breaking because of the absence of the lIe R.
15.3.3
Yukawa couplings
'.j2Mw
'
(15.46)
V-I
v'2Mw L
where in both cases we have used Eq. (15.19) in writing the latter
form. Similarly, the neutral scalar modes have the following cou-
340
plings:
>'
>
H
. me _
-1 V
. ---::-:,9<-".-_
-1.
2cosew
Mz '
(15.47)
mc
11
_
'"15 -
[J
2 co", IJw
Tn
iFz
The neutrino has no coupling with the nelltra.l scalar modes since
the model has no right-chiral neutrino.
15.3.4
(2, 6)'
UAll
dAR
2
(1'3)'
1
(1, -3)'
(15.48)
the Yukawa couplings c.an connect any two generations. So for the
quarks,
~Yuk
= -
L
A.B
(hAuiiH<i>dBR
+ h~BiiAI.J,llHR + h.c.),
(15.49)
341
where </> = iTo</>'. We now see the differences with the leptonic sector,
which we discuss in some detail.
Here we have two kinds of terms. In the leptonic sector, we had
only the first kind since there are no right handed neutrinos in the
model. The right chiralities of the up-type quarks ,::ow give rise to
the second term. In constructing this, we have used <I> defined above,
which contains the complex conjugates of the fields appearing in the
multiplet <1>:
1
: (2'-2)
o Exercise 15.8 Ij </> is
lln~ ~U(2)
(15.50)
342
The mass terms of these quarks coming from Eq. (15.49) can then
be written as
L(KmK't)AB dALdBR.
A.B
(15.52)
oLio<
=-
9 "(J2
'"AL'Y "d AL W+
"+ h .c. )
= - ~2 L
(UAL"Y"KAB9BLW: + h.c.)
(15.54)
A.B
Exercise 15.9 Find the couplings of the Z bOSOT\s 'With the qUQTk
eigensta.les. Show tl\o.t these do not inuolue the mixing ma.trix K I
and i. giuen by Eq. (15.41).
15.4
343
2int = - 2 cos 8W
(15.56)
where
(15,57)
which follow from Eq, (15.41), The Feynman amplitude obtained
from this would be
At = -
'98
2cos
(15,58)
(15,59)
In writing this expression, we have neglected the rermion masses since
the Z-boson is much heavier than all known fermions which it can
decay to, Thus we obtain
1..... 1
9
(~(k)(~(k))
- cos28w
x (aJ + bJ)(P"p'" + p"p'~ - 9~vp' p'),
-/, 2 _
(15.60)
344
external photon legs in Eq. (8.88). For a massive gauge boson like
the Z, this expression cannot be used for two reasons. First, k 2 is not
zero for a massive on-shell particle with momentum k. Second, an
arbitrary massive gauge boson need not couple to conserved currents.
Since a spin-I boson callnot have more than three internal degrees
of freedom, we can always choose the physical polarization vectors
so that each of them satisfies the. relation
(15.61)
-0".
(15.62)
In the case of the photon, only two such vectors are allowed for
reasons described in Ch. 8. But in the case of a massive gauge boson,
there can be three of them. For the 3-momentum k and energy
E = Vk2 + M2, these are the two unit spatial vectors orthogonal to
k, and a third one given by
(15.63)
where k is the unit vector along k. This is usually called the longitudinal polarization vector since its spatial components are in the
same direction as k, and so we have denote.d it with the subscript
'I'. The transverse polarization vectors, on the other hand, can be
chosen just as for the photons. Combining, we find that the three
physical polarization vectors satisfy the relation
(15.64)
345
Decay rate
Going back to Eq. (15.60) now, we can write the matrix element
square as
. (15.65)
The rest frame of the Z-boson is defined by
k"=(Mz,O).
(15.66)
(15.67)
where p = ~ M z since the masses of the fermions are being neglected.
Using these, we obtain
1~12 = 3
2
'2
')
20 (af+bj).
9 2MZ
cos
(15.68)
Plugging this into Eq. (7.119) and performing the angular integrations, we find the decay rate to be
qz --> f
f) =
g2Mz
(02+b 2 )
4811" cos 2 Ow f
f
12sin 2
aMz
(112 +b2 ).
2
Ow cos Ow f
f
(15.69)
using Eq. (15.40) in the last step. Note thiit this is the decay rate
into a specific pair of decay products. To find the total decay rate of
the Z-boson, one needs to sum the rate.s over all possible final states.
o Exercise 15.10 Using Mz
346
r(H -t+r) =
<>m)MH
(1 _
4m))~'
M'h
(15.70)
IHint: Ha\le you sun this done ea,,-lieT in th.e book in 80me jonn?1
15.5
Scattering processes
15.5.1
Forward-backward asymmetry
"(, Z
H,(
Figure 15.2: Lowest order dioagrams (or the process e-e+ -1J-J.1.+ in the
electrowea k theory.
There are four diagrams in the lowest order, as shown in Fig. 15.2.
Of these, we have already calculated the amplitude for the photon
mediated diagram in 9.6 and found
(15.71)
where 8 is the Mandelstam variable. Notice also that the diagrams
mediated by the Hand ( contain couplings which are proportional
to the fermion masses. It was already argued in 9.6 that it is perfectly justifiable to neglect the electron mass in studying this process.
Hence these two diagrams do not contribute to the amplitude in this
approximation. The coupling of the electron and the muon with the
Z-boson are the same, given in Eq. (15.39). Using Eq. (15.40), we
347
. 28
sm
'Y,,(gV - gA'YS) ,
(15.72)
where
(15.73)
Then we can write the Z-mediated amplitude as
2
e .fz
Jltz = - [jj(k2h~(gv - gA'Y5)U(kt} ]
by choosing the
[u(ptl'Y~(9V - 9A'YS)V(P2)] ,
(15.74)
fz =
sin 2 28
w (s -
M~)
(15.75)
IJltl 2= ~ L
IJIt, + JltZ!2 .
(15.76)
SP1~
There are four terms, one of which has been calculated in 9.6 and
found to be
(15.77)
where now we neglect the mnon mass as well, anticipating that the
corrections from the Z-boson can be important only if s is comparable to M~, and therefore much higher than m~. The square of the
Z-mediated amplitude is given by
(15.78)
JIt;Jltz = e:{ZTr
[jln~(gv -
9A'YoJjlnP]
(15.79)
348
The 9A9Y terms vanish because they multiply one trace involving "15
which is antisymmetric in the Lorentz indices A, p, and another trace
which is symmetric in these indices. We are then left with
.41;.41.
+ h.c.
(15.81)
where
at = 2Jz9~
2
a2 = 4 f Z9A
+ fi(9~ + 9~f ,
2 2
+ 8f2Z9Y9A'
(15.82)
.A
"/2
dC!;"
dC!
dOsinO- dOsinOu
dn
"/2
dn
-_ 1
In
dC!
(15.83)
dOsinO dn
with the integration over the azimuthal alll4lc implied ror each illtegral. For this process. Eq. (15.81) gives
A=~
0'2
8 1 + al
(1584)
tA-11,
349
e(p)
e(p')
Figure 15.3:
15.5.2
--+
vpe
in the
,.J{' =
Ap
(i
)2
_ig
9
-
2cosOw
q - Mz
(15.85)
where we have used the Feynman- 't Houft gaUR" and introduced the
notation q = k - k' = pi - p.
Let us suppose now that the energies involved in the process are
much smaller than M z. Then q2 M~. and we call neglect the
momentum dependence of the Z propagator to write
.4 = ( 2M z
~osew
(15.86)
350
2lnt =
~ [,p(""n~(1 -
"YS)V>hl]
[,p(,)"Y~CqV
- 9A"YS),pk)] . (15.87)
Cp -
g2
(15.88)
using Eq. (15.22) in the last step. Thus at low energies, weak interaction is given by 4-fermion interactions.
In this limit therefore, the calculation of the cross section is very
similar to what was shown in 7.5. We omit the details and write
directly
1A'l12 =
16C}[(gV
_ gA)2(k' . p)2
da
dO
C2p m 2,
4,,2
(m, +w -wcasO)2
x [(9V
+ 9A)2w2 + (gV
(15.90)
Here 0 is the angle between the initial and the final neutrino momen ta, and
(15.91)
is the energy of the final neutrino. The total cross section can be
found by integrating over the angular variables. For w m, one
obtains
a =
C}m.w [
2,,'
(gv
1
+ gAl 2+ 3(gV
jJ.-
----1
- gAl
e-
2] .
+ Vc + V/-l.'
(15.92)
VTOCe.eds
351
Exercise 15.15 For the elastic 8Cilttering between the Lie Q,nd the
electron, there is a1\ additional diagram with a. W -bo80n exchange
which contributea at this order. Add th.e a.mplitude of this diagmm
with that oj the Z-medio.ted diagrom, a.nd show that IAfj 2 is giuen
b-y the same form 0.8 in Eq. (15.89) prouide.d we define
1 2sm
' 8w,
9V=2+
15.5.3
9A =
'2.
(15.93)
1, Z
(a)
(b)
There are five diagrams for this process at the tree level. One of
them, shown in Fig. 15.4a, has an intermediate neutrino line. Two
others are collectively shown in Fig. 15Ab, where the internal line
can be either a photon or a Z-boson. In addition, there are diagrams
involving exchanges of neutral scalars Hand (.
The calculation is very lengthy for unpolarized particles in the
initial as well as in the final states. So we will demonstrate this
calculation in a very specific easel characterized by the following
conditions:
1. The electrons have positive helicity.
352
Ma.
(15.95)
These considerations allow us to write down the amplitudes in
the Feynman-'t Hooft gauge ""
(L -
k+hg~v
Exercise 15.16 C:u: the FCllumnn rule for cuhic coupling from
Fi{J. 14.1 and the. fLt'.ji.nition:; oj UH~ Z boson lLlut th.e. photon in. Eq.
(15.20) to 1Je.rif1J lhf' ~VWZ una WH/A toll.phn.~p! UlH'rt (~houc.
353
0-S_lM1)
2
vf(= vf(,+vf(z = e [VR(p+h'UR(P_)]
x V~",(L,k+),~(L)<~(k+).
(15.98)
+ Mw)(k+
M;t (k+ L
s
M2 (k+ - L)"
(15.99)
2 w
llsing s
- L),
= !s in the center of
mass frame. The factor in Eq. (15.98) coming from the propagators
can also be simplified as
1
s
s- M~
M1
M1 .
---;-(--"M:-:e,C7
'" - -s2
ss- z)
(15.100)
~mplitude to
be
(15.101)
using the relation b<!tween the masses of the Wand the Z bosons
from Eq. (15.22).
Exercise 15.17 * Show that one obtains c:mctllJ th.e same a.mplitude as in Eq. (t5.101) if the external Ht'-linea aTe imagined to be
repln('.ed by Ute tines. You need to deriue titf'. Fe:ynman ruLes jar
the 4> coupLings to cnleulate this dia.grum. INote: Thi.~ cqui\lUlence
of the amplitude holds only for the lonfjitudinul polnrizn.tion stale a.t
energies much high.er than thf'. gClU!Je hOMn
tnc eqtLivalenCf~ theorem. I
In.U~l(,
and is known as
There is now no average over initial spin ~illce we have taken the
initial fermions in specific spin states. So wp cannot directly use
the spin sum formulas while calculatinR the ;jquare of this matrix
element. Instead, we use the chirality projec.tic)J] operat.ors to write
(15.102)
354
= [u(p_hPRv(p+)] [v(p+)-Y>-Ru(p_)]
(15.103)
spin
+ p~rI;.
- g>'Pp+. p_)
+ <-term.
(15.104)
1.41'1
4
(
>.
-P
= 28 2 cos4 Ow P+I'-
>. p i >
. )
+ p-p+
- 28g P (k+
- L)>.(k+ - k_)p
e4
sin 2 O.
(15.105)
4cos 4 Ow
Here 0 is the scattering angle, which we have taken to be the angle
between p_ and k_. We have also used kinematical relations like
p+ . p_ = k+ . k_ = ~8 which are valid with our assumptions.
The scattering cross section can now easily be obtained using Eq.
(7.106):
7,",,2
a = 68 cos4 Ow .
(15.106)
<if
C'm' (
1
dfl = 7:8"~ 1-;) coso).
(15.107)
15.6
355
"'(x)
;~rt)
(15.109)
(15.110)
We can now use the methods of 3.7 to fiud the propagator of this
field. We will get
l:J.p(p) =
p' -
.'
Tn' + unr
(15.1ll)
356
A similar analysis for vector bosons would give the following propagator for an unstable vector boson in the Feynman 't HODft gauge:
D"v(p) = -
2
g"v.
.
p - rn 2 + Mar
(15.112)
Exercise 15.19 Find thf", jorwnrd-backulO.nl. o.slJmme.trll in e- e+ Ali. Take sin 2 8w = 0.23 UR hf'jore, and r z = 2.49 Ge V.
15.7
where q herc stands for all quark fields, and B i. the baryon number
of quarks, usually taken to be
Antiquarks havc B =
All
other particles are assumed to have zero baryon number and hence
do not transform under this symmetry operation. One can go back
and check easily that no iuteraction of the standard model changes
a quark into a lepton, hence this symmetry.
In the leptonic sector also there are symmetries of this kind. For
example consider
1.
-1.
(15.114)
where e is any negatively charged lepton or it.s corresponding neutrino. Conventionally, the quantity (" called it'plon number, is taken
to be 1 for all of them and -I for their l1.nt.iparticlco. All other particles have zero lepton numher. In fact. unlike the quarks, there is.
no intergcnerational mixing in the lcptollic spctor of the :::;tundard
model, so even the lepton numbers corrcspondiug t.o each generation
357
The two sums in this equation are over the left-chiral and the rightchiral fermions, and !Z is any diagonal local charge. The general
condition is somewhat more involved, but this is enough to show
that baryon number and lepton number are not symmetries if we
include non-perturbative effects. However, the difference B - . is
still a global symmetry in the model, sinc.e it satisfies all the tests
like the ones given in Eq. (15.115).
(~=-~) (B-f2 = O.
(~=- ~) (B- )..'11' =
0,
(15.116)
IHint:
Appendix A
Useful formulas
A.I
Representation of ')'-matrices
(A.2)
(A.3)
for some unitary matrix U. In view of this fact, we tried to do everything in a way that is manifestly independent of the representation
of the 'Y-matrices.
In order to gain some insight into the solutions, sometimes a
specific representation is helpful. For example, in 4.3.2, we used the
Dirac-Pauli representation, in which the matrices are given by
'Y
0=
(I 0)
0 -I
. (0
"'(I =
0")
_a i 0
(A.4)
'
where I is the 2 x 2 unit matrix and the O"'s are the Pauli matrices:
1
(0 I)
0'=10'
0'
359
(I 0)
0 -I
(A.5)
360
~5 = (JooJ),
I
(ok0 )
uk
(A.6)
-J)
(A.7)
"I = ( -J 0
Notice that the matrices "I' have the same form as in the Dirac-Pauli
is different. In this representation,
representation, but
,0
(A.B)
Thus the chirality projection operators in this representation have
the form
~(l+"I5)= (;~),
(A.9)
So the chiral eigenstates will have zeros for either the upper two components, or the lower two. If one has to deal with chiral eigenstates
explicitly, this is a more convenient representation to use. It is used
extensively, for example, in discussing supersymmetric field theories,
a subject which is beyond the scope of the present book. In this representation, Oij arc the same as in the Dirac-Pauli representation,
whereas
_ .
a 0, 1
(0' )
0
-0
'
(A.IO)
361
IS
;u
'Y = (
-iU
0 )
iu 3
1
_;u 1
(A.Il)
02)
'Y5 = ( uO -u
(A.12)
Notice that all the 'Y-matrices are purely imaginary. For one thing,
it assures that the u~v's are also purely imaginary. In the Dirac
equation, the operator i-y~a~ - m is now completely real. As a result,
if we have a solution where all the components are real at one time,
they will remain real for all subsequent times. This is very useful if
there are fermionic particles which are antiparticles of themselves.
o Exercise A.I Find
A.2
(1~./I18
Traces of ,,-matrices
For the sake of notational simplicity, we will use a number of 4vectors which we will denote by a" with r = 1,2,3 , " and consider
traces of the form
(A.13)
We first show that Tn vanishes if n is odd. For this, we use the
properties of the matrix 'Y5. Since its square is the unit matrix, we
can write
Tn(al,02,'''On) = Tr ['Y5'Y5~1~2'''~nJ
= Tr 1'Y5~1~2'" ~n'Y5J ,
(A.14)
using the cyclic property of traces. We now take the 'Y5 appearing
at the end through the ~k 's. Since 'Y5 anticommutes with all the
'Y" 's, we will obtain a minus sign each time we go through one of the
slashed vectors. To go through n of them, we will obtain a factor
362
(_I)n, at which point the two factors of ", will be sitting next to
each other and we will forget them since tilo:;e two factors will give
1
(AI5)
Tn
vanishes.
vectors a ano b,
1# = 2a b - N,
(A.16)
T1 (a"a2) = Tr 1~'~2]
= Tr 12a, 'a11 - Tr [~2~,1
= Tr [2a, . a2]- Tr [~,hJ
where we have lIsed the c.yclic property of traces.
terms, we obtain
'
(A.17)
By rearranging the
0, '"1Tr [IJ,
(A.18)
T2 = 4o, . "1.
(A.19)
Once this is done, all higher traces can 1)(> expressed in terms of
T2 . For example. starting now with the definit.ion of T, and \Ising
this relation repeatedly, we obtain
363
The remaining trace is equal to the original trace due to the cyclic
property of traces. So we obtain
T4 (01,02,03,0.)
T2n (al
a2,a2n)
= at a 2 T2n-2(a3,Q4,a2n)
-al . a3 T2n -
2 (a2, f11,'"
a2n)
+ ...
(A.22)
The traces can also be expressed in their bare form, without using
the 4-vcctors. E'or ex;\mple, from Eq. (A.19). we c;\n extract the coefficients of afa2 from both sidC'B"i to write
(A.23)
Tr 1"1,,)""15) - - Tr 1"1",-,',,,]
- - Tr h,,"1,,),,].
(A 25)
364
These four have to be all different, because if any two are the same,
the trace can be reduced to the form in Eq. (A.25). Because difference "I-matrices anticommute, the trace has to be proportional to the
antisymmetric tensor. The proportionality constant can be fixed by
calculating Tr hO"lI1'2'Y3'Y51,
(A.26)
To obtain higher traces involving "15, it is useful to use the identity
"Ip"l""I' = gp""I' - gp'''I"
+ g",gp -
i<P"'p"lP"l5,
(A.27)
(A.28)
Exercise A.3 ShOUl that a.n" ma.tN 'Which ant\commutes with all
the ~JJ mU8t be a. multiple oj "(5. [Hint: Use the ba.sis matrices gi'Uen
in Eq. (.\.14).1
A.3
+1.
(A.29)
Following the usual rules for raising and lowering of indices, this
would also imply
,0123
= -1.
(A.30)
(A.31)
365
where the square brackets indicate that all permutations of the lower
indices are to be added, even permutations with a factor of + 1 and
odd permutations with a factor of -1. This can be verified by direct
substitution. When one index is contracted, we obtain
f
IJ-V>'P
E~II'),.!p'
(A.32)
We can now go further and contract one more index. This will
give
(A.33)
Another contraction would lead to the identity
~v>..p
fiJv>.(I -
69pl'
p
(A.34)
24 ,
= -
(A.35)
A.4
A.4.1
LX; = r
(A.36)
i=l
d N x f(T) = eN
(A.37)
366
(A.38)
In this case, the integral appearing on the right side of Eq. (A.37)
can be rewritten as
=a N fo~ dppN-1
r -function
cxp(-/). (A.39)
(AAO)
where we have written (
result:
~CN(/"f(NI2).
(AAl)
On the other hand. using Eq. (A.36), we can write the left side
in the form
JdNxex[l(-~x:la2)
= [[:dTex p
=
(-x 2/ a2
aN 1r(1/2)]N .
)r
(AA2)
For N = 2, Eqs. (AAl) and (AA2) give f(1/2) =.fii. For arbitrary
N, we then obtain
eN
o
27r N /'l
= r(NI2) .
(AA3)
f(r)={~
ifr
if,. >
R,
n.
(A4~)
the integTation clt'.jill('.(l in Eq. (A.3"1) stw'ld,d. hl1.n. gi,llf'lt 1I~ tlH' votume
of n sphere in N~di1rl('1L:flon. UI\f> the Jormtlln for (',\,' !)il:ell. ClhOl~f' tn
ucrifll thllt. one ohtlLi.ll~ the ('orn'cl "uol'U.1lL(," for N = 2.3.
A.4.2
367
(A.45)
.(
=,
-I
)'H
d kE
(k'jy
(21f)N (k~ + a2)' '
(A.46)
At this point, we can use the result obtained above for the integration
over the angular variables to write
(A.47)
where
T
roo
Jo
J,(N) -
y"-l+~N
dy (y + I)'
(A.48)
z=
y+1
(A.49)
In that case,
Y
I - z = --"-..,y
+1'
dy
dZ=-(y+I)2'
(A.50)
So we can write
J;(N)
= 10"0 (Y~YI)2
=
fal dz
(1 -
(y~J-l+jN (y~J-'-l-jN
zr-l+ jN Z'-'-I-jN
=B(r+~N,s-r-~N),
(A.51)
368
In the last step, we have introduced the beta-function of mathematical analysis, which can be given in terms of the f-function defined
above:
B(
z,
z') = f(z)f(z')
(A.52)
r(z+z').
="
f(r
r
+ 2)fts f(s)
r - 2)
(A.54)
Appendix B
H = L-
Hamiltonian :
i=l
state :
N
number operator:
.%=
Lara..
i=l
Ex. 1.1. Maxwell equations are given in Ch. 8. The Lorentz force law on
a particle with charge q is
dpl' = qF~. dx.
dr
dr
where
x~
Ex.
.~
369
370
Ex. fl.7.
= Iq.
a) P.
00
b)
H= ;1 L
(p~ + z2w~q~).
k=1
c) 11 a!n] d) H
~ -2-(1'1.
""".
1 + 1.1.).
1
= L.
k=l
Ex. 2.8.
a) T"V = 8"</>8"</> - 9"v!f,
b) T"" = 8"</>18"</> + 8"</>8"</>1 - 9""!f.
c) TIJI/ = _F~P8tJ A p _ gJ.JII,:LJ.
Ex. fl.9.
a) j" = ;q(</>18"</> - </>8"</>1).
b) j" = iq(</>18"</> - <I>8"</>1 + 2iqA"</>I</.
Ex. fl.10. j" =8"(x"</8"</>-x"!f.
Ex. 3.5. P"
Ex. 3.7. Q
J
J
=~
= iq
d p H(p)a,(p) -
4.9.
a~(p)adp)].
= -p"v,(p)v,(p).
Ex.
4.26e
>.
.,;f(AJlIJ
-. >.
!1/J'Y>'aJ.tIll/J
(T\x u
T\,xj.J),
where
>.
'15)"'(p) .
6.4.
S(3') = (_ih)3
/-
(2rr)'o'(k _ p _ p') [1
J(~:~,
1]
v'2WkV )2 Ep V .j2Ep ,v
= (
-,
(2
h)'
x
"
)'6'(k
J(~:~,
371
-1'-1'
')
[1
)
2W k
I]
Ex. 7.6
r=
G'FffiJ's
r(1f+ .- e+ve )
r(7r+
8:~ +)
192,,3 (I -
m'
mP
=2
J.L+v j , )
----<+
,
(mm;.--m')'
m; .
2
+ A,f2 All
jV.
d3 k k P
L, a;(k)a,(k), wherp kO =
Wk
This expres-
akfk~ kj k~ (EJ.<IQlyjJE~"lpo
Ep,ClI>...,Eyf3l p/J
1f JI1I
:>..p(k t , k2 , k3 , kot ) =
E}.laIJld ElIt3I~")
bkf k~ kj k~ ( Ep,QljJ'v,E~~>'" E>".,I>..'p' E~P.' + EIJ011 "1I' Er~>..' E ym >..' p' E:~P.'
+
+
d x tPbtP,.
Index
IPI diagrams, see irreducible
diagrams
IPR diagrams, see reducible diagrama
relation
antilinear operator, 212-214, 219
anti-neutrino, 2, 74
364-365
antisymmetry of fermions, lOS, lID,
176
168, 285
291
bare
fields, 273, 274
Lagrangian, 273, 274, 277
parameters, 274, 277
dimension of, 95
anomalous magnetic moment, see
magnetic moment,
constant, 74
bi-unitary transformation, 341
Bianchi identity, 318
bilinear covariants of fermion fields,
anomalous
anticommutation relation, 5, 48, 86,
124, 220
of Dirac matrices, 48-50, 54, 59,
120, 209, 215, 239
of fermionic fields, 66-68, 84, 97,
102, 103, 212, 220, see also
antisymmetry of fermions
342
373
374
Index
canonical
commutation relations, 30, 32,
33,38
momentum, 19-21,29,30,32,
38,150,153,161,295
qU8J\tization. 29, 80, 153
center-of-m8.9S frame. see frame,
eM
Index
375
343, 349
Feynman diagram, 87-112, 155,172,
254,261
for vertices, 110
.'lee
Dirac matrices
Index
376
GaU88 theorem, 17, 18, 22
Nambu-Goldstone bosons
Goldstone theorem, 300-304
Gordon identity, 56, 223, 225, 234
gravity, 324, 326
Green's function, 41, 43, 44, 149, 151,
154, 163, see a130 Feynman
propagator
group
helicity
eigenstates, 61, 62, 351
of neutrinos, .fee neutrino helicity
projection operators, 60-62
Higgs booon, 75, 335, 339, 340, 346
field, 339
interactions, 338
multiplet, 330, 33B
neutral, 349
Higgs mechanism, 308-311
hypercharge, 329, 330, 336, 357
377
Index
Lorentz transformation, 7, 16, 25-26,
magnetic moment
anomalous. 228-238, 242, 259,
272. 294
Dirac, 227
Majora"a representation, see
representation of gamma
matrices
340
helicity, 141,335
mass. 124,336
masslessness of, 335, 336, 339
I.'
P-decay
mass, 289, 293
Noether
charge, 24, 67
current, 24, 39, 64, 321
theorem, 21-21, 40, 167,200,
223, 283, 30 I
non-Abelian
226
of stales. 5, 35, 37, 44. 76. 94-97,
159, 222
nucleons, 75, 288
number operator, 5, 37, 39, 40
off-shell particle, )) 1, 5U 000 virtual
particles
onshell
condition, 111, )88,235,280
378
Index
equivalence theorem
transverse, 344
for photons, 156-159, 161,
184-189, 192, 193
and gauge invariance, 184-185,
187
longitudinal, 157
scalar, 156. 157, 161
transverse, 157
324, 326-328
electric charge as unit, 10. 166,
288
magnetic moment, 242
mass, 289, 293
scattering with electrons,
241-244
pseudoscalar., 205, 206, 212
QeD, 323-325
QED, 166-199, 245, 248, 283, 284,
286, 312, 313, 315, 318, 323,
326, 329, 333, 338, 346, 348
divergent amplitudes, 2:)0-252
invariance under discrete
symmetries. 206, 212, 216,
218, 294
renormaJiza.tion, 253-282
vertex function, 230-241
quantiza.tion
canonical, see canonical
quantization
first, 37
second, 37
Quantum chromodynamics, su QeD
Quantum electrodynamics, see QED
quark
color, 324
masses, 279
Index
379
275
R( gauge, 334
S-matrix, 8ll-86, liS, 116, 130, 131,
155, 172, 174, 175, 180, 184,
185, 194, 230, 275
scalar electrodynamics, 169
scattering angle, 135, 142, 143, 181,
354
self-energy
for fermions, 174.251,254-157,
265-267, 27ll-272
for non-Abelian gauge fields, 323,
324
for photon,
see. vacuum
polarization
simple harmonic oscillator, 3-5, 32 36
singlet representation, see under
group representat.ion
spin of a Dirac particle, 65
380
Index
104, 174
theorem, 82-86, 88, 101, 106, 174
Wick rotation, 235-237, 367
Yang-Mills theories, ~ee non-Abelian
gauge theory
YukaW8.
coupling, 339-34l
interaction, 75,87,101,117,256,
338
theory, 75, 104, 288
286-288,290,313,341, 359
units,
8U
natural units.
Heaviside-Lorentz units